ATTINY10_14 [ATMEL]

Atmel 8-bit AVR Microcontroller;
ATTINY10_14
型号: ATTINY10_14
厂家: ATMEL    ATMEL
描述:

Atmel 8-bit AVR Microcontroller

微控制器
文件: 总170页 (文件大小:4275K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Atmel 8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 512/1024  
Bytes In-System Programmable Flash  
ATtiny4 / ATtiny5 / ATtiny9 / ATtiny10  
Features  
High Performance, Low Power AVR® 8-Bit Microcontroller  
Advanced RISC Architecture  
– 54 Powerful Instructions – Most Single Clock Cycle Execution  
– 16 x 8 General Purpose Working Registers  
– Fully Static Operation  
– Up to 12 MIPS Throughput at 12 MHz  
Non-volatile Program and Data Memories  
– 512/1024 Bytes of In-System Programmable Flash Program Memory  
– 32 Bytes Internal SRAM  
– Flash Write/Erase Cycles: 10,000  
– Data Retention: 20 Years at 85oC / 100 Years at 25oC  
Peripheral Features  
– QTouch® Library Support for Capacitive Touch Sensing (1 Channel)  
– One 16-bit Timer/Counter with Prescaler and Two PWM Channels  
– Programmable Watchdog Timer with Separate On-chip Oscillator  
– 4-channel, 8-bit Analog to Digital Converter (ATtiny5/10, only)  
– On-chip Analog Comparator  
Special Microcontroller Features  
– In-System Programmable (at 5V, only)  
– External and Internal Interrupt Sources  
– Low Power Idle, ADC Noise Reduction, and Power-down Modes  
– Enhanced Power-on Reset Circuit  
– Programmable Supply Voltage Level Monitor with Interrupt and Reset  
– Internal Calibrated Oscillator  
I/O and Packages  
– Four Programmable I/O Lines  
– 6-pin SOT and 8-pad UDFN  
Operating Voltage:  
– 1.8 – 5.5V  
Programming Voltage:  
– 5V  
Speed Grade  
– 0 – 4 MHz @ 1.8 – 5.5V  
– 0 – 8 MHz @ 2.7 – 5.5V  
– 0 – 12 MHz @ 4.5 – 5.5V  
Industrial and Extended Temperature Ranges  
Low Power Consumption  
– Active Mode:  
• 200µA at 1MHz and 1.8V  
– Idle Mode:  
• 25µA at 1MHz and 1.8V  
– Power-down Mode:  
• < 0.1µA at 1.8V  
Rev. 8127F–AVR–02/2013  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
1. Pin Configurations  
Figure 1-1. Pinout of ATtiny4/5/9/10  
SOT-23  
(PCINT0/TPIDATA/OC0A/ADC0/AIN0) PB0  
1
2
3
6
5
4
PB3 (RESET/PCINT3/ADC3)  
VCC  
PB2 (T0/CLKO/PCINT2/INT0/ADC2)  
GND  
(PCINT1/TPICLK/CLKI/ICP0/OC0B/ADC1/AIN1) PB1  
UDFN  
1
2
3
4
8
7
6
5
(PCINT1/TPICLK/CLKI/ICP0/OC0B/ADC1/AIN1) PB1  
PB2 (T0/CLKO/PCINT2/INT0/ADC2)  
VCC  
PB3 (RESET/PCINT3/ADC3)  
PB0 (AIN0/ADC0/OC0A/TPIDATA/PCINT0)  
NC  
NC  
GND  
1.1  
Pin Description  
1.1.1  
VCC  
Supply voltage.  
1.1.2  
1.1.3  
GND  
Ground.  
Port B (PB3..PB0)  
This is a 4-bit, bi-directional I/O port with internal pull-up resistors, individually selectable for each bit. The output  
buffers have symmetrical drive characteristics, with both high sink and source capability. As inputs, the port pins  
that are externally pulled low will source current if pull-up resistors are activated. Port pins are tri-stated when a  
reset condition becomes active, even if the clock is not running.  
The port also serves the functions of various special features of the ATtiny4/5/9/10, as listed on page 36.  
1.1.4  
RESET  
Reset input. A low level on this pin for longer than the minimum pulse length will generate a reset, even if the clock  
is not running and provided the reset pin has not been disabled. The minimum pulse length is given in Table 16-4  
on page 118. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset.  
The reset pin can also be used as a (weak) I/O pin.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
2
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
2. Overview  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 are low-power CMOS 8-bit microcontrollers based on the compact AVR enhanced RISC architec-  
ture. By executing powerful instructions in a single clock cycle, the ATtiny4/5/9/10 achieve throughputs  
approaching 1 MIPS per MHz, allowing the system designer to optimize power consumption versus processing  
speed.  
Figure 2-1. Block Diagram  
VCC  
RESET  
PROGRAMMING  
LOGIC  
PROGRAM  
COUNTER  
INTERNAL  
OSCILLATOR  
CALIBRATED  
OSCILLATOR  
PROGRAM  
FLASH  
STACK  
POINTER  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
TIMING AND  
CONTROL  
INSTRUCTION  
REGISTER  
RESET FLAG  
REGISTER  
SRAM  
INSTRUCTION  
DECODER  
MCU STATUS  
REGISTER  
GENERAL  
PURPOSE  
REGISTERS  
CONTROL  
LINES  
X
Y
Z
TIMER/  
COUNTER0  
INTERRUPT  
UNIT  
ALU  
ISP  
STATUS  
REGISTER  
INTERFACE  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
DATA REGISTER  
PORT B  
DIRECTION  
REG. PORT B  
ANALOG  
COMPARATOR  
ADC  
DRIVERS  
PORT B  
PB3:0  
GND  
The AVR core combines a rich instruction set with 16 general purpose working registers and system registers. All  
registers are directly connected to the Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU), allowing two independent registers to be  
accessed in one single instruction executed in one clock cycle. The resulting architecture is compact and code effi-  
cient while achieving throughputs up to ten times faster than conventional CISC microcontrollers.  
The ATtiny4/5/9/10 provide the following features: 512/1024 byte of In-System Programmable Flash, 32 bytes of  
SRAM, four general purpose I/O lines, 16 general purpose working registers, a 16-bit timer/counter with two PWM  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
3
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
channels, internal and external interrupts, a programmable watchdog timer with internal oscillator, an internal cali-  
brated oscillator, and four software selectable power saving modes. ATtiny5/10 are also equipped with a four-  
channel, 8-bit Analog to Digital Converter (ADC).  
Idle mode stops the CPU while allowing the SRAM, timer/counter, ADC (ATtiny5/10, only), analog comparator, and  
interrupt system to continue functioning. ADC Noise Reduction mode minimizes switching noise during ADC con-  
versions by stopping the CPU and all I/O modules except the ADC. In Power-down mode registers keep their  
contents and all chip functions are disabled until the next interrupt or hardware reset. In Standby mode, the oscilla-  
tor is running while the rest of the device is sleeping, allowing very fast start-up combined with low power  
consumption.  
The device is manufactured using Atmel’s high density non-volatile memory technology. The on-chip, in-system  
programmable Flash allows program memory to be re-programmed in-system by a conventional, non-volatile  
memory programmer.  
The ATtiny4/5/9/10 AVR are supported by a suite of program and system development tools, including macro  
assemblers and evaluation kits.  
2.1  
Comparison of ATtiny4, ATtiny5, ATtiny9 and ATtiny10  
A comparison of the devices is shown in Table 2-1.  
Table 2-1.  
Differences between ATtiny4, ATtiny5, ATtiny9 and ATtiny10  
Device  
Flash  
ADC  
No  
Signature  
ATtiny4  
ATtiny5  
ATtiny9  
ATtiny10  
512 bytes  
512 bytes  
1024 bytes  
1024 bytes  
0x1E 0x8F 0x0A  
0x1E 0x8F 0x09  
0x1E 0x90 0x08  
0x1E 0x90 0x03  
Yes  
No  
Yes  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
4
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
3. General Information  
3.1  
Resources  
A comprehensive set of drivers, application notes, data sheets and descriptions on development tools are available  
for download at http://www.atmel.com/microcontroller/avr.  
3.2  
Code Examples  
This documentation contains simple code examples that briefly show how to use various parts of the device. These  
code examples assume that the part specific header file is included before compilation. Be aware that not all C  
compiler vendors include bit definitions in the header files and interrupt handling in C is compiler dependent.  
Please confirm with the C compiler documentation for more details.  
3.3  
Capacitive Touch Sensing  
Atmel QTouch Library provides a simple to use solution for touch sensitive interfaces on Atmel AVR microcon-  
trollers. The QTouch Library includes support for QTouch® and QMatrix® acquisition methods.  
Touch sensing is easily added to any application by linking the QTouch Library and using the Application Program-  
ming Interface (API) of the library to define the touch channels and sensors. The application then calls the API to  
retrieve channel information and determine the state of the touch sensor.  
The QTouch Library is free and can be downloaded from the Atmel website. For more information and details of  
implementation, refer to the QTouch Library User Guide – also available from the Atmel website.  
3.4  
Data Retention  
Reliability Qualification results show that the projected data retention failure rate is much less than 1 PPM over 20  
years at 85°C or 100 years at 25°C.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
5
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
4. CPU Core  
This section discusses the AVR core architecture in general. The main function of the CPU core is to ensure cor-  
rect program execution. The CPU must therefore be able to access memories, perform calculations, control  
peripherals, and handle interrupts.  
4.1  
Architectural Overview  
Figure 4-1. Block Diagram of the AVR Architecture  
DataBus 8-bit  
Program  
Counter  
Status  
and Control  
Flash  
Program  
Memory  
16 x 8  
General  
Purpose  
Registrers  
Instruction  
Register  
Interrupt  
Unit  
Instruction  
Decoder  
Watchdog  
Timer  
ALU  
Analog  
Comparator  
Control Lines  
ADC  
Timer/Counter 0  
Data  
SRAM  
I/O Lines  
In order to maximize performance and parallelism, the AVR uses a Harvard architecture – with separate memories  
and buses for program and data. Instructions in the program memory are executed with a single level pipelining.  
While one instruction is being executed, the next instruction is pre-fetched from the program memory. This concept  
enables instructions to be executed in every clock cycle. The program memory is In-System reprogrammable  
Flash memory.  
The fast-access Register File contains 16 x 8-bit general purpose working registers with a single clock cycle  
access time. This allows single-cycle Arithmetic Logic Unit (ALU) operation. In a typical ALU operation, two oper-  
ands are output from the Register File, the operation is executed, and the result is stored back in the Register File  
– in one clock cycle.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
6
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Six of the 16 registers can be used as three 16-bit indirect address register pointers for data space addressing –  
enabling efficient address calculations. One of the these address pointers can also be used as an address pointer  
for look up tables in Flash program memory. These added function registers are the 16-bit X-, Y-, and Z-register,  
described later in this section.  
The ALU supports arithmetic and logic operations between registers or between a constant and a register. Single  
register operations can also be executed in the ALU. After an arithmetic operation, the Status Register is updated  
to reflect information about the result of the operation.  
Program flow is provided by conditional and unconditional jump and call instructions, capable of directly addressing  
the whole address space. Most AVR instructions have a single 16-bit word format but 32-bit wide instructions also  
exist. The actual instruction set varies, as some devices only implement a part of the instruction set.  
During interrupts and subroutine calls, the return address Program Counter (PC) is stored on the Stack. The Stack  
is effectively allocated in the general data SRAM, and consequently the Stack size is only limited by the SRAM size  
and the usage of the SRAM. All user programs must initialize the SP in the Reset routine (before subroutines or  
interrupts are executed). The Stack Pointer (SP) is read/write accessible in the I/O space. The data SRAM can  
easily be accessed through the four different addressing modes supported in the AVR architecture.  
The memory spaces in the AVR architecture are all linear and regular memory maps.  
A flexible interrupt module has its control registers in the I/O space with an additional Global Interrupt Enable bit in  
the Status Register. All interrupts have a separate Interrupt Vector in the Interrupt Vector table. The interrupts have  
priority in accordance with their Interrupt Vector position. The lower the Interrupt Vector address, the higher the  
priority.  
The I/O memory space contains 64 addresses for CPU peripheral functions as Control Registers, SPI, and other  
I/O functions. The I/O memory can be accessed as the data space locations, 0x0000 - 0x003F.  
4.2  
4.3  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit  
The high-performance AVR ALU operates in direct connection with all the 16 general purpose working registers.  
Within a single clock cycle, arithmetic operations between general purpose registers or between a register and an  
immediate are executed. The ALU operations are divided into three main categories – arithmetic, logical, and bit-  
functions. Some implementations of the architecture also provide a powerful multiplier supporting both  
signed/unsigned multiplication and fractional format. See document “AVR Instruction Set” and section “Instruction  
Set Summary” on page 150 for a detailed description.  
Status Register  
The Status Register contains information about the result of the most recently executed arithmetic instruction. This  
information can be used for altering program flow in order to perform conditional operations. Note that the Status  
Register is updated after all ALU operations, as specified in document “AVR Instruction Set” and section “Instruc-  
tion Set Summary” on page 150. This will in many cases remove the need for using the dedicated compare  
instructions, resulting in faster and more compact code.  
The Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine and restored when returning  
from an interrupt. This must be handled by software.  
4.4  
General Purpose Register File  
The Register File is optimized for the AVR Enhanced RISC instruction set. In order to achieve the required perfor-  
mance and flexibility, the following input/output schemes are supported by the Register File:  
• One 8-bit output operand and one 8-bit result input  
• Two 8-bit output operands and one 8-bit result input  
• One 16-bit output operand and one 16-bit result input  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
7
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 4-2 below shows the structure of the 16 general purpose working registers in the CPU.  
Figure 4-2. AVR CPU General Purpose Working Registers  
7
0
R16  
R17  
R18  
General  
Purpose  
Working  
Registers  
R26  
R27  
R28  
R29  
R30  
R31  
X-register Low Byte  
X-register High Byte  
Y-register Low Byte  
Y-register High Byte  
Z-register Low Byte  
Z-register High Byte  
Note:  
A typical implementation of the AVR register file includes 32 general prupose registers but ATtiny4/5/9/10 implement  
only 16 registers. For reasons of compatibility the registers are numbered R16...R31, not R0...R15.  
Most of the instructions operating on the Register File have direct access to all registers, and most of them are sin-  
gle cycle instructions.  
4.4.1  
The X-register, Y-register, and Z-register  
Registers R26..R31 have some added functions to their general purpose usage. These registers are 16-bit  
address pointers for indirect addressing of the data space. The three indirect address registers X, Y, and Z are  
defined as described in Figure 4-3.  
Figure 4-3. The X-, Y-, and Z-registers  
15  
7
XH  
R27  
YH  
XL  
0
0
X-register  
Y-register  
Z-register  
0
0
0
7
7
7
R26  
15  
7
YL  
0
0
R29  
ZH  
R28  
15  
7
ZL  
0
0
R31  
R30  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
8
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
In different addressing modes these address registers function as automatic increment and automatic decrement  
(see document “AVR Instruction Set” and section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for details).  
4.5  
Stack Pointer  
The Stack is mainly used for storing temporary data, for storing local variables and for storing return addresses  
after interrupts and subroutine calls. The Stack Pointer Register always points to the top of the Stack. Note that the  
Stack is implemented as growing from higher memory locations to lower memory locations. This implies that a  
Stack PUSH command decreases the Stack Pointer.  
The Stack Pointer points to the data SRAM Stack area where the Subroutine and Interrupt Stacks are located. This  
Stack space in the data SRAM must be defined by the program before any subroutine calls are executed or inter-  
rupts are enabled. The Stack Pointer must be set to point above 0x40. The Stack Pointer is decremented by one  
when data is pushed onto the Stack with the PUSH instruction, and it is decremented by two when the return  
address is pushed onto the Stack with subroutine call or interrupt. The Stack Pointer is incremented by one when  
data is popped from the Stack with the POP instruction, and it is incremented by two when data is popped from the  
Stack with return from subroutine RET or return from interrupt RETI.  
The AVR Stack Pointer is implemented as two 8-bit registers in the I/O space. The number of bits actually used is  
implementation dependent. Note that the data space in some implementations of the AVR architecture is so small  
that only SPL is needed. In this case, the SPH Register will not be present.  
4.6  
Instruction Execution Timing  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for instruction execution. The AVR CPU is driven by the  
CPU clock clkCPU, directly generated from the selected clock source for the chip. No internal clock division is used.  
Figure 4-4. The Parallel Instruction Fetches and Instruction Executions  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
clkCPU  
1st Instruction Fetch  
1st Instruction Execute  
2nd Instruction Fetch  
2nd Instruction Execute  
3rd Instruction Fetch  
3rd Instruction Execute  
4th Instruction Fetch  
Figure 4-4 shows the parallel instruction fetches and instruction executions enabled by the Harvard architecture  
and the fast access Register File concept. This is the basic pipelining concept to obtain up to 1 MIPS per MHz with  
the corresponding unique results for functions per cost, functions per clocks, and functions per power-unit.  
Figure 4-5 shows the internal timing concept for the Register File. In a single clock cycle an ALU operation using  
two register operands is executed, and the result is stored back to the destination register.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
9
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 4-5. Single Cycle ALU Operation  
T1  
T2  
T3  
T4  
clkCPU  
Total Execution Time  
Register Operands Fetch  
ALU Operation Execute  
Result Write Back  
4.7  
Reset and Interrupt Handling  
The AVR provides several different interrupt sources. These interrupts and the separate Reset Vector each have a  
separate Program Vector in the program memory space. All interrupts are assigned individual enable bits which  
must be written logic one together with the Global Interrupt Enable bit in the Status Register in order to enable the  
interrupt.  
The lowest addresses in the program memory space are by default defined as the Reset and Interrupt Vectors.  
The complete list of vectors is shown in “Interrupts” on page 35. The list also determines the priority levels of the  
different interrupts. The lower the address the higher is the priority level. RESET has the highest priority, and next  
is INT0 – the External Interrupt Request 0.  
When an interrupt occurs, the Global Interrupt Enable I-bit is cleared and all interrupts are disabled. The user soft-  
ware can write logic one to the I-bit to enable nested interrupts. All enabled interrupts can then interrupt the current  
interrupt routine. The I-bit is automatically set when a Return from Interrupt instruction – RETI – is executed.  
There are basically two types of interrupts. The first type is triggered by an event that sets the Interrupt Flag. For  
these interrupts, the Program Counter is vectored to the actual Interrupt Vector in order to execute the interrupt  
handling routine, and hardware clears the corresponding Interrupt Flag. Interrupt Flags can also be cleared by writ-  
ing a logic one to the flag bit position(s) to be cleared. If an interrupt condition occurs while the corresponding  
interrupt enable bit is cleared, the Interrupt Flag will be set and remembered until the interrupt is enabled, or the  
flag is cleared by software. Similarly, if one or more interrupt conditions occur while the Global Interrupt Enable bit  
is cleared, the corresponding Interrupt Flag(s) will be set and remembered until the Global Interrupt Enable bit is  
set, and will then be executed by order of priority.  
The second type of interrupts will trigger as long as the interrupt condition is present. These interrupts do not nec-  
essarily have Interrupt Flags. If the interrupt condition disappears before the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt will  
not be triggered.  
When the AVR exits from an interrupt, it will always return to the main program and execute one more instruction  
before any pending interrupt is served.  
Note that the Status Register is not automatically stored when entering an interrupt routine, nor restored when  
returning from an interrupt routine. This must be handled by software.  
When using the CLI instruction to disable interrupts, the interrupts will be immediately disabled. No interrupt will be  
executed after the CLI instruction, even if it occurs simultaneously with the CLI instruction.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
10  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
When using the SEI instruction to enable interrupts, the instruction following SEI will be executed before any pend-  
ing interrupts, as shown in the following example.  
Assembly Code Example  
sei  
; set Global Interrupt Enable  
sleep  
; enter sleep, waiting for interrupt  
; note: will enter sleep before any pending interrupt(s)  
Note:  
See “Code Examples” on page 5.  
4.7.1  
Interrupt Response Time  
The interrupt execution response for all the enabled AVR interrupts is four clock cycles minimum. After four clock  
cycles the Program Vector address for the actual interrupt handling routine is executed. During this four clock cycle  
period, the Program Counter is pushed onto the Stack. The vector is normally a jump to the interrupt routine, and  
this jump takes three clock cycles. If an interrupt occurs during execution of a multi-cycle instruction, this instruction  
is completed before the interrupt is served. If an interrupt occurs when the MCU is in sleep mode, the interrupt exe-  
cution response time is increased by four clock cycles. This increase comes in addition to the start-up time from the  
selected sleep mode.  
A return from an interrupt handling routine takes four clock cycles. During these four clock cycles, the Program  
Counter (two bytes) is popped back from the Stack, the Stack Pointer is incremented by two, and the I-bit in SREG  
is set.  
4.8  
Register Description  
4.8.1  
CCP – Configuration Change Protection Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x3C  
CCP[7:0]  
CCP  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
W
0
W
0
W
0
W
0
W
0
W
0
W
0
R/W  
0
• Bits 7:0 – CCP[7:0] – Configuration Change Protection  
In order to change the contents of a protected I/O register the CCP register must first be written with the correct  
signature. After CCP is written the protected I/O registers may be written to during the next four CPU instruction  
cycles. All interrupts are ignored during these cycles. After these cycles interrupts are automatically handled again  
by the CPU, and any pending interrupts will be executed according to their priority.  
When the protected I/O register signature is written, CCP[0] will read as one as long as the protected feature is  
enabled, while CCP[7:1] will always read as zero.  
Table 4-1 shows the signatures that are in recognised.  
Table 4-1.  
Signature  
0xD8  
Signatures Recognised by the Configuration Change Protection Register  
Group  
Description  
IOREG: CLKMSR, CLKPSR, WDTCSR  
Protected I/O register  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
11  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
4.8.2  
SPH and SPL — Stack Pointer Register  
Bit  
15  
SP15  
SP7  
14  
SP14  
SP6  
13  
SP13  
SP5  
12  
SP12  
SP4  
11  
SP11  
SP3  
10  
SP10  
SP2  
9
SP9  
8
SP8  
0x3E  
0x3D  
SPH  
SPL  
SP1  
SP0  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Read/Write  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Initial Value  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
RAMEND  
4.8.3  
SREG – Status Register  
Bit  
7
I
6
T
5
H
4
S
3
V
2
N
1
Z
0
C
0x3F  
SREG  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7 – I: Global Interrupt Enable  
The Global Interrupt Enable bit must be set for the interrupts to be enabled. The individual interrupt enable control  
is then performed in separate control registers. If the Global Interrupt Enable Register is cleared, none of the inter-  
rupts are enabled independent of the individual interrupt enable settings. The I-bit is cleared by hardware after an  
interrupt has occurred, and is set by the RETI instruction to enable subsequent interrupts. The I-bit can also be set  
and cleared by the application with the SEI and CLI instructions, as described in the document “AVR Instruction  
Set” and “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150.  
• Bit 6 – T: Bit Copy Storage  
The Bit Copy instructions BLD (Bit LoaD) and BST (Bit STore) use the T-bit as source or destination for the oper-  
ated bit. A bit from a register in the Register File can be copied into T by the BST instruction, and a bit in T can be  
copied into a bit in a register in the Register File by the BLD instruction.  
• Bit 5 – H: Half Carry Flag  
The Half Carry Flag H indicates a Half Carry in some arithmetic operations. Half Carry is useful in BCD arithmetic.  
See document “AVR Instruction Set” and section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for detailed information.  
• Bit 4 – S: Sign Bit, S = N V  
The S-bit is always an exclusive or between the Negative Flag N and the Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V. See  
document “AVR Instruction Set” and section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for detailed information.  
• Bit 3 – V: Two’s Complement Overflow Flag  
The Two’s Complement Overflow Flag V supports two’s complement arithmetics. See document “AVR Instruction  
Set” and section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for detailed information.  
• Bit 2 – N: Negative Flag  
The Negative Flag N indicates a negative result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See document “AVR Instruction  
Set” and section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for detailed information.  
• Bit 1 – Z: Zero Flag  
The Zero Flag Z indicates a zero result in an arithmetic or logic operation. See document “AVR Instruction Set” and  
section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for detailed information.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
12  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• Bit 0 – C: Carry Flag  
The Carry Flag C indicates a carry in an arithmetic or logic operation. See document “AVR Instruction Set” and  
section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for detailed information.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
13  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
5. Memories  
This section describes the different memories in the ATtiny4/5/9/10. Devices have two main memory areas, the  
program memory space and the data memory space.  
5.1  
In-System Re-programmable Flash Program Memory  
The ATtiny4/5/9/10 contain 512/1024 bytes of on-chip, in-system reprogrammable Flash memory for program stor-  
age. Since all AVR instructions are 16 or 32 bits wide, the Flash is organized as 256/512 x 16.  
The Flash memory has an endurance of at least 10,000 write/erase cycles. The ATtiny4/5/9/10 Program Counter  
(PC) is 9 bits wide, thus capable of addressing the 256/512 program memory locations, starting at 0x000. “Memory  
Programming” on page 106 contains a detailed description on Flash data serial downloading.  
Constant tables can be allocated within the entire address space of program memory. Since program memory can  
not be accessed directly, it has been mapped to the data memory. The mapped program memory begins at byte  
address 0x4000 in data memory (see Figure 5-1 on page 15). Although programs are executed starting from  
address 0x000 in program memory it must be addressed starting from 0x4000 when accessed via the data  
memory.  
Internal write operations to Flash program memory have been disabled and program memory therefore appears to  
firmware as read-only. Flash memory can still be written to externally but internal write operations to the program  
memory area will not be succesful.  
Timing diagrams of instruction fetch and execution are presented in “Instruction Execution Timing” on page 9.  
5.2  
Data Memory  
Data memory locations include the I/O memory, the internal SRAM memory, the non-volatile memory lock bits, and  
the Flash memory. See Figure 5-1 on page 15 for an illustration on how the ATtiny4/5/9/10 memory space is  
organized.  
The first 64 locations are reserved for I/O memory, while the following 32 data memory locations address the inter-  
nal data SRAM.  
The non-volatile memory lock bits and all the Flash memory sections are mapped to the data memory space.  
These locations appear as read-only for device firmware.  
The four different addressing modes for data memory are direct, indirect, indirect with pre-decrement, and indirect  
with post-increment. In the register file, registers R26 to R31 function as pointer registers for indirect addressing.  
The IN and OUT instructions can access all 64 locations of I/O memory. Direct addressing using the LDS and STS  
instructions reaches the 128 locations between 0x0040 and 0x00BF.  
The indirect addressing reaches the entire data memory space. When using indirect addressing modes with auto-  
matic pre-decrement and post-increment, the address registers X, Y, and Z are decremented or incremented.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
14  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 5-1. Data Memory Map (Byte Addressing)  
I/O SPACE  
SRAM DATA MEMORY  
(reserved)  
0x0000 ... 0x003F  
0x0040 ... 0x005F  
0x0060 ... 0x3EFF  
0x3F00 ... 0x3F01  
0x3F02 ... 0x3F3F  
0x3F40 ... 0x3F41  
0x3F42 ... 0x3F7F  
0x3F80 ... 0x3F81  
0x3F82 ... 0x3FBF  
0x3FC0 ... 0x3FC3  
0x3FC4 ... 0x3FFF  
NVM LOCK BITS  
(reserved)  
CONFIGURATION BITS  
(reserved)  
CALIBRATION BITS  
(reserved)  
DEVICE ID BITS  
(reserved)  
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY 0x4000 ... 0x41FF/0x43FF  
(reserved) 0x4400 ... 0xFFFF  
5.2.1  
Data Memory Access Times  
This section describes the general access timing concepts for internal memory access. The internal data SRAM  
access is performed in two clkCPU cycles as described in Figure 5-2.  
Figure 5-2. On-chip Data SRAM Access Cycles  
T1  
T2  
T3  
clkCPU  
Address valid  
Compute Address  
Address  
Data  
WR  
Data  
RD  
Memory Access Instruction  
Next Instruction  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
15  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
5.3  
I/O Memory  
The I/O space definition of the ATtiny4/5/9/10 is shown in “Register Summary” on page 148.  
All ATtiny4/5/9/10 I/Os and peripherals are placed in the I/O space. All I/O locations may be accessed using the LD  
and ST instructions, enabling data transfer between the 16 general purpose working registers and the I/O space.  
I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In  
these registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions. See document  
“AVR Instruction Set” and section “Instruction Set Summary” on page 150 for more details. When using the I/O  
specific commands IN and OUT, the I/O addresses 0x00 - 0x3F must be used.  
For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory  
addresses should never be written.  
Some of the status flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that CBI and SBI instructions will only  
operate on the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such status flags. The CBI and SBI  
instructions work on registers in the address range 0x00 to 0x1F, only.  
The I/O and Peripherals Control Registers are explained in later sections.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
16  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
6. Clock System  
Figure 6-1 presents the principal clock systems and their distribution in ATtiny4/5/9/10. All of the clocks need not  
be active at a given time. In order to reduce power consumption, the clocks to modules not being used can be  
halted by using different sleep modes and power reduction register bits, as described in “Power Management and  
Sleep Modes” on page 23. The clock systems is detailed below.  
Figure 6-1. Clock Distribution  
ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL  
CONVERTER  
GENERAL  
CPU  
RAM  
NVM  
I/O MODULES  
CORE  
clkADC  
clkI/O  
clkNVM  
clkCPU  
CLOCK CONTROL UNIT  
SOURCE CLOCK  
RESET  
LOGIC  
WATCHDOG  
CLOCK  
WATCHDOG  
TIMER  
CLOCK  
PRESCALER  
CLOCK  
SWITCH  
EXTERNAL  
CLOCK  
WATCHDOG  
OSCILLATOR  
CALIBRATED  
OSCILLATOR  
6.1  
Clock Subsystems  
The clock subsystems are detailed in the sections below.  
6.1.1  
CPU Clock – clkCPU  
The CPU clock is routed to parts of the system concerned with operation of the AVR Core. Examples of such mod-  
ules are the General Purpose Register File, the System Registers and the SRAM data memory. Halting the CPU  
clock inhibits the core from performing general operations and calculations.  
6.1.2  
6.1.3  
I/O Clock – clkI/O  
The I/O clock is used by the majority of the I/O modules, like Timer/Counter. The I/O clock is also used by the  
External Interrupt module, but note that some external interrupts are detected by asynchronous logic, allowing  
such interrupts to be detected even if the I/O clock is halted.  
NVM clock - clkNVM  
The NVM clock controls operation of the Non-Volatile Memory Controller. The NVM clock is usually active simulta-  
neously with the CPU clock.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
17  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
6.1.4  
ADC Clock – clkADC  
The ADC is provided with a dedicated clock domain. This allows halting the CPU and I/O clocks in order to reduce  
noise generated by digital circuitry. This gives more accurate ADC conversion results.  
The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only.  
6.2  
Clock Sources  
All synchronous clock signals are derived from the main clock. The device has three alternative sources for the  
main clock, as follows:  
• Calibrated Internal 8 MHz Oscillator (see page 18)  
• External Clock (see page 18)  
• Internal 128 kHz Oscillator (see page 19)  
See Table 6-3 on page 21 on how to select and change the active clock source.  
6.2.1  
Calibrated Internal 8 MHz Oscillator  
The calibrated internal oscillator provides an approximately 8 MHz clock signal. Though voltage and temperature  
dependent, this clock can be very accurately calibrated by the user. See Table 16-2 on page 117, Figure 17-39 on  
page 141 and Figure 17-40 on page 141 for more details.  
This clock may be selected as the main clock by setting the Clock Main Select bits CLKMS[1:0] in CLKMSR to  
0b00. Once enabled, the oscillator will operate with no external components. During reset, hardware loads the cal-  
ibration byte into the OSCCAL register and thereby automatically calibrates the oscillator. The accuracy of this  
calibration is shown as Factory calibration in Table 16-2 on page 117.  
When this oscillator is used as the main clock, the watchdog oscillator will still be used for the watchdog timer and  
reset time-out. For more information on the pre-programmed calibration value, see section “Calibration Section” on  
page 109.  
6.2.2  
External Clock  
To use the device with an external clock source, CLKI should be driven as shown in Figure 6-2. The external clock  
is selected as the main clock by setting CLKMS[1:0] bits in CLKMSR to 0b10.  
Figure 6-2. External Clock Drive Configuration  
EXTERNAL  
CLKI  
GND  
CLOCK  
SIGNAL  
When applying an external clock, it is required to avoid sudden changes in the applied clock frequency to ensure  
stable operation of the MCU. A variation in frequency of more than 2% from one clock cycle to the next can lead to  
unpredictable behavior. It is required to ensure that the MCU is kept in reset during such changes in the clock  
frequency.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
18  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
6.2.3  
Internal 128 kHz Oscillator  
The internal 128 kHz oscillator is a low power oscillator providing a clock of 128 kHz. The frequency depends on  
supply voltage, temperature and batch variations. This clock may be select as the main clock by setting the  
CLKMS[1:0] bits in CLKMSR to 0b01.  
6.2.4  
6.2.5  
Switching Clock Source  
The main clock source can be switched at run-time using the “CLKMSR – Clock Main Settings Register” on page  
21. When switching between any clock sources, the clock system ensures that no glitch occurs in the main clock.  
Default Clock Source  
The calibrated internal 8 MHz oscillator is always selected as main clock when the device is powered up or has  
been reset. The synchronous system clock is the main clock divided by 8, controlled by the System Clock Pres-  
caler. The Clock Prescaler Select Bits can be written later to change the system clock frequency. See “System  
Clock Prescaler”.  
6.3  
System Clock Prescaler  
The system clock is derived from the main clock via the System Clock Prescaler. The system clock can be divided  
by setting the “CLKPSR – Clock Prescale Register” on page 22. The system clock prescaler can be used to  
decrease power consumption at times when requirements for processing power is low or to bring the system clock  
within limits of maximum frequency. The prescaler can be used with all main clock source options, and it will affect  
the clock frequency of the CPU and all synchronous peripherals.  
The System Clock Prescaler can be used to implement run-time changes of the internal clock frequency while still  
ensuring stable operation.  
6.3.1  
Switching Prescaler Setting  
When switching between prescaler settings, the system clock prescaler ensures that no glitch occurs in the system  
clock and that no intermediate frequency is higher than neither the clock frequency corresponding the previous set-  
ting, nor the clock frequency corresponding to the new setting.  
The ripple counter that implements the prescaler runs at the frequency of the main clock, which may be faster than  
the CPU's clock frequency. Hence, it is not possible to determine the state of the prescaler - even if it were read-  
able, and the exact time it takes to switch from one clock division to another cannot be exactly predicted.  
From the time the CLKPS values are written, it takes between T1 + T2 and T1 + 2*T2 before the new clock fre-  
quency is active. In this interval, two active clock edges are produced. Here, T1 is the previous clock period, and  
T2 is the period corresponding to the new prescaler setting.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
19  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
6.4  
Starting  
6.4.1  
Starting from Reset  
The internal reset is immediately asserted when a reset source goes active. The internal reset is kept asserted until  
the reset source is released and the start-up sequence is completed. The start-up sequence includes three steps,  
as follows.  
1. The first step after the reset source has been released consists of the device counting the reset start-up  
time. The purpose of this reset start-up time is to ensure that supply voltage has reached sufficient levels.  
The reset start-up time is counted using the internal 128 kHz oscillator. See Table 6-1 for details of reset  
start-up time.  
Note that the actual supply voltage is not monitored by the start-up logic. The device will count until the  
reset start-up time has elapsed even if the device has reached sufficient supply voltage levels earlier.  
2. The second step is to count the oscillator start-up time, which ensures that the calibrated internal oscillator  
has reached a stable state before it is used by the other parts of the system. The calibrated internal oscil-  
lator needs to oscillate for a minimum number of cycles before it can be considered stable. See Table 6-1  
for details of the oscillator start-up time.  
3. The last step before releasing the internal reset is to load the calibration and the configuration values from  
the Non-Volatile Memory to configure the device properly. The configuration time is listed in Table 6-1.  
Table 6-1.  
Reset  
Start-up Times when Using the Internal Calibrated Oscillator  
Oscillator  
Configuration Total start-up time  
21 cycles  
64 ms + 6 oscillator cycles + 21 system clock cycles (1)  
64 ms  
6 cycles  
Notes: 1. After powering up the device or after a reset the system clock is automatically set to calibrated internal 8 MHz oscil-  
lator, divided by 8  
6.4.2  
Starting from Power-Down Mode  
When waking up from Power-Down sleep mode, the supply voltage is assumed to be at a sufficient level and only  
the oscillator start-up time is counted to ensure the stable operation of the oscillator. The oscillator start-up time is  
counted on the selected main clock, and the start-up time depends on the clock selected. See Table 6-2 for details.  
Table 6-2.  
Start-up Time from Power-Down Sleep Mode.  
Oscillator start-up time  
Total start-up time  
6 cycles  
6 oscillator cycles (1)  
Notes: 1. The start-up time is measured in main clock oscillator cycles.  
6.4.3  
Starting from Idle / ADC Noise Reduction / Standby Mode  
When waking up from Idle, ADC Noise Reduction or Standby Mode, the oscillator is already running and no oscilla-  
tor start-up time is introduced.  
The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
20  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
6.5  
Register Description  
6.5.1  
CLKMSR – Clock Main Settings Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
CLKMS1  
R/W  
0
CLKMS0  
R/W  
0x37  
CLKMSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
• Bit 7:2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and always read zero.  
• Bit 1:0 – CLKMS[1:0]: Clock Main Select Bits  
These bits select the main clock source of the system. The bits can be written at run-time to switch the source of  
the main clock. The clock system ensures glitch free switching of the main clock source.  
The main clock alternatives are shown in Table 6-3.  
Table 6-3.  
Selection of Main Clock  
CLKM1  
CLKM0  
Main Clock Source  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Calibrated Internal 8 MHzOscillator  
Internal 128 kHz Oscillator (WDT Oscillator)  
External clock  
Reserved  
To avoid unintentional switching of main clock source, a protected change sequence must be followed to change  
the CLKMS bits, as follows:  
1. Write the signature for change enable of protected I/O register to register CCP  
2. Within four instruction cycles, write the CLKMS bits with the desired value  
6.5.2  
OSCCAL – Oscillator Calibration Register  
.
Bit  
7
CAL7  
R/W  
X
6
CAL6  
R/W  
X
5
CAL5  
R/W  
X
4
CAL4  
R/W  
X
3
CAL3  
R/W  
X
2
CAL2  
R/W  
X
1
CAL1  
R/W  
X
0
CAL0  
R/W  
X
0x39  
OSCCAL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bits 7:0 CAL[7:0]: Oscillator Calibration Value  
The oscillator calibration register is used to trim the calibrated internal oscillator and remove process variations  
from the oscillator frequency. A pre-programmed calibration value is automatically written to this register during  
chip reset, giving the factory calibrated frequency as specified in Table 16-2, “Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC  
Oscillator,” on page 117.  
The application software can write this register to change the oscillator frequency. The oscillator can be calibrated  
to frequencies as specified in Table 16-2, “Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator,” on page 117. Calibration  
outside the range given is not guaranteed.  
The CAL[7:0] bits are used to tune the frequency of the oscillator. A setting of 0x00 gives the lowest frequency, and  
a setting of 0xFF gives the highest frequency.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
21  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
6.5.3  
CLKPSR – Clock Prescale Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
CLKPS3  
R/W  
2
CLKPS2  
R/W  
1
CLKPS1  
R/W  
0
CLKPS0  
R/W  
0x36  
CLKPSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
1
1
• Bits 7:4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read as zero.  
• Bits 3:0 – CLKPS[3:0]: Clock Prescaler Select Bits 3 - 0  
These bits define the division factor between the selected clock source and the internal system clock. These bits  
can be written at run-time to vary the clock frequency and suit the application requirements. As the prescaler  
divides the master clock input to the MCU, the speed of all synchronous peripherals is reduced accordingly. The  
division factors are given in Table 6-4.  
Table 6-4.  
Clock Prescaler Select  
CLKPS3  
CLKPS2  
CLKPS1  
CLKPS0  
Clock Division Factor  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
2
4
8 (default)  
16  
32  
64  
128  
256  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
To avoid unintentional changes of clock frequency, a protected change sequence must be followed to change the  
CLKPS bits:  
1. Write the signature for change enable of protected I/O register to register CCP  
2. Within four instruction cycles, write the desired value to CLKPS bits  
At start-up, CLKPS bits are reset to 0b0011 to select the clock division factor of 8. If the selected clock source has  
a frequency higher than the maximum allowed the application software must make sure a sufficient division factor  
is used. To make sure the write procedure is not interrupted, interrupts must be disabled when changing prescaler  
settings.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
22  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
7. Power Management and Sleep Modes  
The high performance and industry leading code efficiency makes the AVR microcontrollers an ideal choise for low  
power applications. In addition, sleep modes enable the application to shut down unused modules in the MCU,  
thereby saving power. The AVR provides various sleep modes allowing the user to tailor the power consumption to  
the application’s requirements.  
7.1  
Sleep Modes  
Figure 6-1 on page 17 presents the different clock systems and their distribution in ATtiny4/5/9/10. The figure is  
helpful in selecting an appropriate sleep mode. Table 7-1 shows the different sleep modes and their wake up  
sources.  
Table 7-1.  
Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in Different Sleep Modes  
Active Clock Domains  
Oscillators  
Wake-up Sources  
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ADC Noise Reduction  
Standby  
X (2)  
X (2)  
X (2)  
Power-down  
Note:  
1. The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only  
2. For INT0, only level interrupt.  
To enter any of the four sleep modes, the SE bits in SMCR must be written to logic one and a SLEEP instruction  
must be executed. The SM2:0 bits in the SMCR register select which sleep mode (Idle, ADC Noise Reduction,  
Standby or Power-down) will be activated by the SLEEP instruction. See Table 7-2 for a summary.  
If an enabled interrupt occurs while the MCU is in a sleep mode, the MCU wakes up. The MCU is then halted for  
four cycles in addition to the start-up time, executes the interrupt routine, and resumes execution from the instruc-  
tion following SLEEP. The contents of the Register File and SRAM are unaltered when the device wakes up from  
sleep. If a reset occurs during sleep mode, the MCU wakes up and executes from the Reset Vector.  
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up the changed level must be held for some time to wake up  
the MCU (and for the MCU to enter the interrupt service routine). See “External Interrupts” on page 36 for details.  
7.1.1  
Idle Mode  
When bits SM2:0 are written to 000, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Idle mode, stopping the CPU but  
allowing the analog comparator, timer/counter, watchdog, and the interrupt system to continue operating. This  
sleep mode basically halts clkCPU and clkNVM, while allowing the other clocks to run.  
Idle mode enables the MCU to wake up from external triggered interrupts as well as internal ones like the timer  
overflow. If wake-up from the analog comparator interrupt is not required, the analog comparator can be powered  
down by setting the ACD bit in “ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register” on page 80. This will  
reduce power consumption in idle mode. If the ADC is enabled (ATtiny5/10, only), a conversion starts automatically  
when this mode is entered.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
23  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
7.1.2  
ADC Noise Reduction Mode  
When bits SM2:0 are written to 001, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter ADC Noise Reduction mode,  
stopping the CPU but allowing the ADC, the external interrupts, and the watchdog to continue operating (if  
enabled). This sleep mode halts clkI/O, clkCPU, and clkNVM, while allowing the other clocks to run.  
This mode improves the noise environment for the ADC, enabling higher resolution measurements. If the ADC is  
enabled, a conversion starts automatically when this mode is entered.  
This mode is available in all devices, although only ATtiny5/10 are equipped with an ADC.  
7.1.3  
Power-down Mode  
When bits SM2:0 are written to 010, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Power-down mode. In this mode,  
the oscillator is stopped, while the external interrupts, and the watchdog continue operating (if enabled). Only a  
watchdog reset, an external level interrupt on INT0, or a pin change interrupt can wake up the MCU. This sleep  
mode halts all generated clocks, allowing operation of asynchronous modules only.  
7.1.4  
Standby Mode  
When bits SM2:0 are written to 100, the SLEEP instruction makes the MCU enter Standby mode. This mode is  
identical to Power-down with the exception that the oscillator is kept running. This reduces wake-up time, because  
the oscillator is already running and doesn't need to be started up.  
7.2  
Power Reduction Register  
The Power Reduction Register (PRR), see “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 26, provides a method to  
reduce power consumption by stopping the clock to individual peripherals. When the clock for a peripheral is  
stopped then:  
• The current state of the peripheral is frozen.  
• The associated registers can not be read or written.  
• Resources used by the peripheral will remain occupied.  
The peripheral should in most cases be disabled before stopping the clock. Clearing the PRR bit wakes up the  
peripheral and puts it in the same state as before shutdown.  
Peripheral shutdown can be used in Idle mode and Active mode to significantly reduce the overall power consump-  
tion. See “Supply Current of I/O Modules” on page 121 for examples. In all other sleep modes, the clock is already  
stopped.  
7.3  
Minimizing Power Consumption  
There are several issues to consider when trying to minimize the power consumption in an AVR Core controlled  
system. In general, sleep modes should be used as much as possible, and the sleep mode should be selected so  
that as few as possible of the device’s functions are operating. All functions not needed should be disabled. In par-  
ticular, the following modules may need special consideration when trying to achieve the lowest possible power  
consumption.  
7.3.1  
Analog Comparator  
When entering Idle mode, the analog comparator should be disabled if not used. In the power-down mode, the  
analog comparator is automatically disabled. See “Analog Comparator” on page 80 for further details.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
24  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
7.3.2  
Analog to Digital Converter  
If enabled, the ADC will be enabled in all sleep modes. To save power, the ADC should be disabled before entering  
any sleep mode. When the ADC is turned off and on again, the next conversion will be an extended conversion.  
See “Analog to Digital Converter” on page 82 for details on ADC operation.  
The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only.  
7.3.3  
7.3.4  
Watchdog Timer  
If the Watchdog Timer is not needed in the application, this module should be turned off. If the Watchdog Timer is  
enabled, it will be enabled in all sleep modes, and hence, always consume power. In the deeper sleep modes, this  
will contribute significantly to the total current consumption. Refer to “Watchdog Timer” on page 30 for details on  
how to configure the Watchdog Timer.  
Port Pins  
When entering a sleep mode, all port pins should be configured to use minimum power. The most important thing  
is then to ensure that no pins drive resistive loads. In sleep modes where the I/O clock (clkI/O) is stopped, the input  
buffers of the device will be disabled. This ensures that no power is consumed by the input logic when not needed.  
In some cases, the input logic is needed for detecting wake-up conditions, and it will then be enabled. Refer to the  
section “Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes” on page 44 for details on which pins are enabled. If the input buffer  
is enabled and the input signal is left floating or has an analog signal level close to VCC/2, the input buffer will use  
excessive power.  
For analog input pins, the digital input buffer should be disabled at all times. An analog signal level close to VCC/2  
on an input pin can cause significant current even in active mode. Digital input buffers can be disabled by writing to  
the Digital Input Disable Register (DIDR0). Refer to “DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0” on page 81 for  
details.  
7.4  
Register Description  
7.4.1  
SMCR – Sleep Mode Control Register  
The SMCR Control Register contains control bits for power management.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SE  
R/W  
0
0x3A  
SM2  
R/W  
0
SM1  
R/W  
0
SM0  
R/W  
0
SMCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bits 3:1 – SM2..SM0: Sleep Mode Select Bits 2..0  
These bits select between available sleep modes, as shown in Table 7-2.  
Table 7-2.  
Sleep Mode Select  
SM2  
SM1  
SM0  
Sleep Mode  
Idle  
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
ADC noise reduction (1)  
Power-down  
Reserved  
Standby  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
25  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 7-2.  
Sleep Mode Select  
SM2  
SM1  
SM0  
Sleep Mode  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
Note:  
1. This mode is available in all devices, although only ATtiny5/10 are equipped with an ADC  
• Bit 0 – SE: Sleep Enable  
The SE bit must be written to logic one to make the MCU enter the sleep mode when the SLEEP instruction is exe-  
cuted. To avoid the MCU entering the sleep mode unless it is the programmer’s purpose, it is recommended to  
write the Sleep Enable (SE) bit to one just before the execution of the SLEEP instruction and to clear it immediately  
after waking up.  
7.4.2  
PRR – Power Reduction Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
PRADC  
R/W  
0
0
PRTIM0  
R/W  
0
0x35  
PRR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 1 – PRADC: Power Reduction ADC  
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the ADC. The ADC must be disabled before shut down. The analog com-  
parator cannot use the ADC input MUX when the ADC is shut down.  
The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only.  
• Bit 0 – PRTIM0: Power Reduction Timer/Counter0  
Writing a logic one to this bit shuts down the Timer/Counter0 module. When the Timer/Counter0 is enabled, opera-  
tion will continue like before the shutdown.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
26  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
8. System Control and Reset  
8.1  
Resetting the AVR  
During reset, all I/O registers are set to their initial values, and the program starts execution from the Reset Vector.  
The instruction placed at the Reset Vector must be a RJMP – Relative Jump – instruction to the reset handling rou-  
tine. If the program never enables an interrupt source, the interrupt vectors are not used, and regular program code  
can be placed at these locations. The circuit diagram in Figure 8-1 shows the reset logic. Electrical parameters of  
the reset circuitry are defined in section “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 118.  
Figure 8-1. Reset Logic  
DATA BUS  
Reset Flag Register  
VLM  
(RSTFLR)  
Power-on Reset  
Circuit  
Pull-up Resistor  
SPIKE  
FILTER  
Watchdog  
Oscillator  
Delay Counters  
Clock  
CK  
Generator  
TIMEOUT  
The I/O ports of the AVR are immediately reset to their initial state when a reset source goes active. This does not  
require any clock source to be running.  
After all reset sources have gone inactive, a delay counter is invoked, stretching the internal reset. This allows the  
power to reach a stable level before normal operation starts. The start up sequence is described in “Starting from  
Reset” on page 20.  
8.2  
Reset Sources  
The ATtiny4/5/9/10 have three sources of reset:  
• Power-on Reset. The MCU is reset when the supply voltage is below the Power-on Reset threshold (VPOT  
)
• External Reset. The MCU is reset when a low level is present on the RESET pin for longer than the minimum  
pulse length  
• Watchdog Reset. The MCU is reset when the Watchdog Timer period expires and the Watchdog is enabled  
8.2.1  
Power-on Reset  
A Power-on Reset (POR) pulse is generated by an on-chip detection circuit. The detection level is defined in sec-  
tion “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 118. The POR is activated whenever VCC is below the detection  
level. The POR circuit can be used to trigger the Start-up Reset, as well as to detect a failure in supply voltage.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
27  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
A Power-on Reset (POR) circuit ensures that the device is reset from Power-on. Reaching the Power-on Reset  
threshold voltage invokes the delay counter, which determines how long the device is kept in reset after VCC rise.  
The reset signal is activated again, without any delay, when VCC decreases below the detection level.  
Figure 8-2. MCU Start-up, RESET Tied to VCC  
VPOT  
VCC  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
Figure 8-3. MCU Start-up, RESET Extended Externally  
VPOT  
VCC  
> t TOUT  
VRST  
RESET  
tTOUT  
TIME-OUT  
INTERNAL  
RESET  
8.2.2  
VCC Level Monitoring  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 have a VCC Level Monitoring (VLM) circuit that compares the voltage level at the VCC pin against  
fixed trigger levels. The trigger levels are set with VLM2:0 bits, see “VLMCSR – VCC Level Monitoring Control and  
Status register” on page 33.  
The VLM circuit provides a status flag, VLMF, that indicates if voltage on the VCC pin is below the selected trigger  
level. The flag can be read from VLMCSR, but it is also possible to have an interrupt generated when the VLMF  
status flag is set. This interrupt is enabled by the VLMIE bit in the VLMCSR register. The flag can be cleared by  
changing the trigger level or by writing it to zero. The flag is automatically cleared when the voltage at VCC rises  
back above the selected trigger level.  
The VLM can also be used to improve reset characteristics at falling supply. Without VLM, the Power-On Reset  
(POR) does not activate before supply voltage has dropped to a level where the MCU is not necessarily functional  
any more. With VLM, it is possible to generate a reset earlier.  
When active, the VLM circuit consumes some power, as illustrated in Figure 17-48 on page 145. To save power  
the VLM circuit can be turned off completely, or it can be switched on and off at regular intervals. However, detec-  
tion takes some time and it is therefore recommended to leave the circuitry on long enough for signals to settle.  
See “VCC Level Monitor” on page 118.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
28  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
When VLM is active and voltage at VCC is above the selected trigger level operation will be as normal and the VLM  
can be shut down for a short period of time. If voltage at VCC drops below the selected threshold the VLM will either  
flag an interrupt or generate a reset, depending on the configuration.  
When the VLM has been configured to generate a reset at low supply voltage it will keep the device in reset as long  
as VCC is below the reset level. See Table 8-4 on page 34 for reset level details. If supply voltage rises above the  
reset level the condition is removed and the MCU will come out of reset, and initiate the power-up start-up  
sequence.  
If supply voltage drops enough to trigger the POR then PORF is set after supply voltage has been restored.  
8.2.3  
External Reset  
An External Reset is generated by a low level on the RESET pin if enabled. Reset pulses longer than the minimum  
pulse width (see section “System and Reset Characteristics” on page 118) will generate a reset, even if the clock is  
not running. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate a reset. When the applied signal reaches the Reset  
Threshold Voltage – VRST – on its positive edge, the delay counter starts the MCU after the time-out period – tTOUT  
– has expired. External reset is ignored during Power-on start-up count. After Power-on reset the internal reset is  
extended only if RESET pin is low when the initial Power-on delay count is complete. See Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-  
3 on page 28.  
Figure 8-4. External Reset During Operation  
CC  
8.2.4  
Watchdog Reset  
When the Watchdog times out, it will generate a short reset pulse of one CK cycle duration. On the falling edge of  
this pulse, the delay timer starts counting the time-out period tTOUT. See page 30 for details on operation of the  
Watchdog Timer and Table 16-4 on page 118 for details on reset time-out.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
29  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 8-5. Watchdog Reset During Operation  
CC  
CK  
8.3  
Watchdog Timer  
The Watchdog Timer is clocked from an on-chip oscillator, which runs at 128 kHz. See Figure 8-6. By controlling  
the Watchdog Timer prescaler, the Watchdog Reset interval can be adjusted as shown in Table 8-2 on page 32.  
The WDR – Watchdog Reset – instruction resets the Watchdog Timer. The Watchdog Timer is also reset when it is  
disabled and when a device reset occurs. Ten different clock cycle periods can be selected to determine the reset  
period. If the reset period expires without another Watchdog Reset, the ATtiny4/5/9/10 resets and executes from  
the Reset Vector. For timing details on the Watchdog Reset, refer to Table 8-3 on page 33.  
Figure 8-6. Watchdog Timer  
WATCHDOG  
PRESCALER  
128 kHz  
OSCILLATOR  
WATCHDOG  
RESET  
WDP0  
WDP1  
WDP2  
WDP3  
MUX  
WDE  
MCU RESET  
The Wathdog Timer can also be configured to generate an interrupt instead of a reset. This can be very helpful  
when using the Watchdog to wake-up from Power-down.  
To prevent unintentional disabling of the Watchdog or unintentional change of time-out period, two different safety  
levels are selected by the fuse WDTON as shown in Table 8-1 on page 31. See “Procedure for Changing the  
Watchdog Timer Configuration” on page 31 for details.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
30  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 8-1.  
WDT Configuration as a Function of the Fuse Settings of WDTON  
Safety WDT  
How to  
How to  
WDTON  
Level  
Initial State  
Disable the WDT  
Change Time-out  
Protected change  
sequence  
Unprogrammed  
1
Disabled  
Enabled  
No limitations  
Protected change  
sequence  
Programmed  
2
Always enabled  
8.3.1  
Procedure for Changing the Watchdog Timer Configuration  
The sequence for changing configuration differs between the two safety levels, as follows:  
8.3.1.1  
Safety Level 1  
In this mode, the Watchdog Timer is initially disabled, but can be enabled by writing the WDE bit to one without any  
restriction. A special sequence is needed when disabling an enabled Watchdog Timer. To disable an enabled  
Watchdog Timer, the following procedure must be followed:  
1. Write the signature for change enable of protected I/O registers to register CCP  
2. Within four instruction cycles, in the same operation, write WDE and WDP bits  
8.3.1.2  
Safety Level 2  
In this mode, the Watchdog Timer is always enabled, and the WDE bit will always read as one. A protected change  
is needed when changing the Watchdog Time-out period. To change the Watchdog Time-out, the following proce-  
dure must be followed:  
1. Write the signature for change enable of protected I/O registers to register CCP  
2. Within four instruction cycles, write the WDP bit. The value written to WDE is irrelevant  
8.3.2  
Code Examples  
The following code example shows how to turn off the WDT. The example assumes that interrupts are controlled  
(e.g., by disabling interrupts globally) so that no interrupts will occur during execution of these functions.  
Assembly Code Example  
WDT_off:  
wdr  
; Clear WDRF in RSTFLR  
in r16, RSTFLR  
andi r16, ~(1<<WDRF)  
out RSTFLR, r16  
; Write signature for change enable of protected I/O register  
ldi r16, 0xD8  
out CCP, r16  
; Within four instruction cycles, turn off WDT  
ldi r16, (0<<WDE)  
out WDTCSR, r16  
ret  
Note:  
See “Code Examples” on page 5.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
31  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
8.4  
Register Description  
8.4.1  
WDTCSR – Watchdog Timer Control and Status Register  
Bit  
7
WDIF  
R/W  
0
6
WDIE  
R/W  
0
5
WDP3  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
WDP2  
R/W  
0
1
WDP1  
R/W  
0
0
WDP0  
R/W  
0
0x31  
WDE  
R/W  
X
WDTCSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
• Bit 7 – WDIF: Watchdog Timer Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set when a time-out occurs in the Watchdog Timer and the Watchdog Timer is configured for interrupt.  
WDIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, WDIF is  
cleared by writing a logic one to the flag. When the WDIE is set, the Watchdog Time-out Interrupt is requested.  
• Bit 6 – WDIE: Watchdog Timer Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one, the Watchdog interrupt request is enabled. If WDE is cleared in combination with  
this setting, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt Mode, and the corresponding interrupt is requested if time-out in the  
Watchdog Timer occurs.  
If WDE is set, the Watchdog Timer is in Interrupt and System Reset Mode. The first time-out in the Watchdog  
Timer will set WDIF. Executing the corresponding interrupt vector will clear WDIE and WDIF automatically by hard-  
ware (the Watchdog goes to System Reset Mode). This is useful for keeping the Watchdog Timer security while  
using the interrupt. To stay in Interrupt and System Reset Mode, WDIE must be set after each interrupt. This  
should however not be done within the interrupt service routine itself, as this might compromise the safety-function  
of the Watchdog System Reset mode. If the interrupt is not executed before the next time-out, a System Reset will  
be applied.  
Table 8-2.  
Watchdog Timer Configuration  
WDTON(1)  
WDE  
WDIE  
Mode  
Action on Time-out  
None  
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
Stopped  
Interrupt Mode  
System Reset Mode  
Interrupt  
Reset  
Interrupt and System  
Reset Mode  
Interrupt, then go to  
System Reset Mode  
1
0
1
x
1
x
System Reset Mode  
Reset  
Note:  
1. WDTON configuration bit set to “0“ means programmed and “1“ means unprogrammed.  
• Bit 4 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 3 – WDE: Watchdog System Reset Enable  
WDE is overridden by WDRF in RSTFLR. This means that WDE is always set when WDRF is set. To clear WDE,  
WDRF must be cleared first. This feature ensures multiple resets during conditions causing failure, and a safe  
start-up after the failure.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
32  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• Bits 5, 2:0 – WDP3..0: Watchdog Timer Prescaler 3, 2, 1 and 0  
The WDP3..0 bits determine the Watchdog Timer prescaling when the Watchdog Timer is running. The different  
prescaling values and their corresponding time-out periods are shown in Table 8-3 on page 33.  
Table 8-3.  
Watchdog Timer Prescale Select  
Number of WDT  
Typical Time-out at  
VCC = 5.0V  
WDP3  
WDP2  
WDP1  
WDP0  
Oscillator Cycles  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2K (2048) cycles  
16 ms  
32 ms  
64 ms  
0.125 s  
0.25 s  
0.5 s  
4K (4096) cycles  
8K (8192) cycles  
16K (16384) cycles  
32K (32768) cycles  
64K (65536) cycles  
128K (131072) cycles  
256K (262144) cycles  
512K (524288) cycles  
1024K (1048576) cycles  
1.0 s  
2.0 s  
4.0 s  
8.0 s  
Reserved  
8.4.2  
VLMCSR – VCC Level Monitoring Control and Status register  
Bit  
7
VLMF  
R
6
VLMIE  
R/W  
0
5
4
3
2
VLM2  
R/W  
0
1
VLM1  
R/W  
0
0
0x34  
VLM0  
R/W  
0
VLMCSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 7 – VLMF: VLM Flag  
This bit is set by the VLM circuit to indicate that a voltage level condition has been triggered (see Table 8-4). The  
bit is cleared when the trigger level selection is set to “Disabled”, or when voltage at VCC rises above the selected  
trigger level.  
• Bit 6 – VLMIE: VLM Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is set the VLM interrupt is enabled. A VLM interrupt is generated every time the VLMF flag is set.  
• Bits 5:3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to zero, when the  
register is written.  
• Bits 2:0 – VLM2:0: Trigger Level of Voltage Level Monitor  
These bits set the trigger level for the voltage level monitor, as described in Table 8-4 below.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
33  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 8-4.  
VLM2:0  
000  
Setting the Trigger Level of Voltage Level Monitor.  
Label  
VLM0  
Description  
Voltage Level Monitor disabled  
001  
VLM1L  
VLM1H  
VLM2  
Triggering generates a regular Power-On Reset (POR).  
The VLM flag is not set  
010  
011  
Triggering sets the VLM Flag (VLMF) and generates a VLM  
interrupt, if enabled  
100  
VLM3  
101  
110  
Not allowed  
111  
For VLM voltage levels, see Table 16-6 on page 118.  
8.4.3  
RSTFLR – Reset Flag Register  
The Reset Flag Register provides information on which reset source caused an MCU Reset.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
WDRF  
R/W  
X
2
1
EXTRF  
R/W  
X
0
PORF  
R/W  
X
0x3B  
RSTFLR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:4, 2– Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved bits in ATtiny4/5/9/10 and will always read as zero.  
• Bit 3 – WDRF: Watchdog Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a Watchdog Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the  
flag.  
• Bit 1 – EXTRF: External Reset Flag  
This bit is set if an External Reset occurs. The bit is reset by a Power-on Reset, or by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
• Bit 0 – PORF: Power-on Reset Flag  
This bit is set if a Power-on Reset occurs. The bit is reset only by writing a logic zero to the flag.  
To make use of the Reset Flags to identify a reset condition, the user should read and then reset the MCUSR as  
early as possible in the program. If the register is cleared before another reset occurs, the source of the reset can  
be found by examining the Reset Flags.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
34  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
9. Interrupts  
This section describes the specifics of the interrupt handling in ATtiny4/5/9/10. For a general explanation of the  
AVR interrupt handling, see “Reset and Interrupt Handling” on page 10.  
9.1  
Interrupt Vectors  
Interrupt vectors of ATtiny4/5/9/10 are described in Table 9-1 below.  
Table 9-1.  
Vector No.  
Reset and Interrupt Vectors  
Program Address  
Label  
Interrupt Source  
External Pin, Power-on Reset,  
VLM Reset, Watchdog Reset  
1
0x0000  
RESET  
2
3
0x0001  
0x0002  
0x0003  
0x0004  
0x0005  
0x0006  
0x0007  
0x0008  
0x0009  
0x000A  
INT0  
External Interrupt Request 0  
Pin Change Interrupt Request 0  
Timer/Counter0 Input Capture  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow  
PCINT0  
4
TIM0_CAPT  
TIM0_OVF  
TIM0_COMPA  
TIM0_COMPB  
ANA_COMP  
WDT  
5
6
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A  
Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B  
Analog Comparator  
7
8
9
Watchdog Time-out  
10  
11  
VLM  
VCC Voltage Level Monitor  
ADC Conversion Complete (1)  
ADC  
Note:  
1. The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only.  
In case the program never enables an interrupt source, the Interrupt Vectors will not be used and, consequently,  
regular program code can be placed at these locations.  
The most typical and general setup for interrupt vector addresses in ATtiny4/5/9/10 is shown in the program exam-  
ple below.  
Address Labels Code  
Comments  
0x0000  
0x0001  
0x0002  
0x0003  
0x0004  
0x0005  
0x0006  
0x0007  
0x0008  
0x0009  
0x000A  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
rjmp  
RESET  
; Reset Handler  
INT0  
; IRQ0 Handler  
PCINT0  
TIM0_CAPT  
TIM0_OVF  
TIM0_COMPA  
TIM0_COMPB  
ANA_COMP  
WDT  
; PCINT0 Handler  
; Timer0 Capture Handler  
; Timer0 Overflow Handler  
; Timer0 Compare A Handler  
; Timer0 Compare B Handler  
; Analog Comparator Handler  
; Watchdog Interrupt Handler  
; Voltage Level Monitor Handler  
; ADC Conversion Handler  
VLM  
ADC  
<continues>  
<continued>  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
35  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
0x000B RESET: ldi  
r16, high(RAMEND); Main program start  
SPH,r16 ; Set Stack Pointer  
0x000C  
0x000D  
0x000E  
0x000F  
0x0010  
...  
out  
ldi  
r16, low(RAMEND) ; to top of RAM  
SPL,r16  
out  
sei  
; Enable interrupts  
<instr>  
...  
9.2  
External Interrupts  
External Interrupts are triggered by the INT0 pin or any of the PCINT3..0 pins. Observe that, if enabled, the inter-  
rupts will trigger even if the INT0 or PCINT3..0 pins are configured as outputs. This feature provides a way of  
generating a software interrupt. Pin change 0 interrupts PCI0 will trigger if any enabled PCINT3..0 pin toggles. The  
PCMSK Register controls which pins contribute to the pin change interrupts. Pin change interrupts on PCINT3..0  
are detected asynchronously, which means that these interrupts can be used for waking the part also from sleep  
modes other than Idle mode.  
The INT0 interrupt can be triggered by a falling or rising edge or a low level. This is set up as shown in “EICRA –  
External Interrupt Control Register A” on page 37. When the INT0 interrupt is enabled and configured as level trig-  
gered, the interrupt will trigger as long as the pin is held low. Note that recognition of falling or rising edge interrupts  
on INT0 requires the presence of an I/O clock, as described in “Clock System” on page 17.  
9.2.1  
Low Level Interrupt  
A low level interrupt on INT0 is detected asynchronously. This means that the interrupt source can be used for  
waking the part also from sleep modes other than Idle (the I/O clock is halted in all sleep modes except Idle).  
Note that if a level triggered interrupt is used for wake-up from Power-down, the required level must be held long  
enough for the MCU to complete the wake-up to trigger the level interrupt. If the level disappears before the end of  
the Start-up Time, the MCU will still wake up, but no interrupt will be generated. The start-up time is defined as  
described in “Clock System” on page 17.  
If the low level on the interrupt pin is removed before the device has woken up then program execution will not be  
diverted to the interrupt service routine but continue from the instruction following the SLEEP command.  
9.2.2  
Pin Change Interrupt Timing  
A timing example of a pin change interrupt is shown in Figure 9-1.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
36  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 9-1. Timing of pin change interrupts  
pin_lat  
pcint_in_(0)  
PCINT(0)  
0
x
D
Q
pcint_syn  
pcint_setflag  
PCIF  
pin_sync  
PCINT(0) in PCMSK(x)  
LE  
clk  
clk  
clk  
PCINT(0)  
pin_lat  
pin_sync  
pcint_in_(0)  
pcint_syn  
pcint_setflag  
PCIF  
9.3  
Register Description  
9.3.1  
EICRA – External Interrupt Control Register A  
The External Interrupt Control Register A contains control bits for interrupt sense control.  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
ISC01  
R/W  
0
0
ISC00  
R/W  
0
0x15  
EICRA  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bits 1:0 – ISC01, ISC00: Interrupt Sense Control 0 Bit 1 and Bit 0  
The External Interrupt 0 is activated by the external pin INT0 if the SREG I-flag and the corresponding interrupt  
mask are set. The level and edges on the external INT0 pin that activate the interrupt are defined in Table 9-2. The  
value on the INT0 pin is sampled before detecting edges. If edge or toggle interrupt is selected, pulses that last lon-  
ger than one clock period will generate an interrupt. Shorter pulses are not guaranteed to generate an interrupt. If  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
37  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
low level interrupt is selected, the low level must be held until the completion of the currently executing instruction  
to generate an interrupt.  
Table 9-2.  
Interrupt 0 Sense Control  
ISC01  
ISC00  
Description  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
The low level of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
Any logical change on INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The falling edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
The rising edge of INT0 generates an interrupt request.  
9.3.2  
EIMSK – External Interrupt Mask Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTO  
R/W  
0
0x13  
EIMSK  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:1 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 0 – INT0: External Interrupt Request 0 Enable  
When the INT0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), the external pin interrupt is  
enabled. The Interrupt Sense Control bits (ISC01 and ISC00) in the External Interrupt Control Register A (EICRA)  
define whether the external interrupt is activated on rising and/or falling edge of the INT0 pin or level sensed. Activ-  
ity on the pin will cause an interrupt request even if INT0 is configured as an output. The corresponding interrupt of  
External Interrupt Request 0 is executed from the INT0 Interrupt Vector.  
9.3.3  
EIFR – External Interrupt Flag Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
INTF0  
R/W  
0
0x14  
EIFR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:1 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 0 – INTF0: External Interrupt Flag 0  
When an edge or logic change on the INT0 pin triggers an interrupt request, INTF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in  
SREG and the INT0 bit in EIMSK are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector.  
The flag is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical  
one to it.  
This flag is constantly zero when INT0 is configured as a level interrupt.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
38  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
9.3.4  
PCICR – Pin Change Interrupt Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCIE0  
R/W  
0
0x12  
PCICR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:1 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 0 – PCIE0: Pin Change Interrupt Enable 0  
When the PCIE0 bit is set (one) and the I-bit in the Status Register (SREG) is set (one), pin change interrupt 0 is  
enabled. Any change on any enabled PCINT3..0 pin will cause an interrupt. The corresponding interrupt of Pin  
Change Interrupt Request is executed from the PCI0 Interrupt Vector. PCINT3..0 pins are enabled individually by  
the PCMSK Register.  
9.3.5  
PCIFR – Pin Change Interrupt Flag Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
PCIF0  
R/W  
0
0x11  
PCIFR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:1 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 0 – PCIF0: Pin Change Interrupt Flag 0  
When a logic change on any PCINT3..0 pin triggers an interrupt request, PCIF0 becomes set (one). If the I-bit in  
SREG and the PCIE0 bit in PCICR are set (one), the MCU will jump to the corresponding Interrupt Vector. The flag  
is cleared when the interrupt routine is executed. Alternatively, the flag can be cleared by writing a logical one to it.  
9.3.6  
PCMSK – Pin Change Mask Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
PCINT3  
R/W  
0
2
PCINT2  
R/W  
0
1
PCINT1  
R/W  
0
0
PCINT0  
R/W  
0
0x10  
PCMSK  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:4 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bits 3:0 – PCINT3..0: Pin Change Enable Mask 3..0  
Each PCINT3..0 bit selects whether pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT3..0 is  
set and the PCIE0 bit in PCICR is set, pin change interrupt is enabled on the corresponding I/O pin. If PCINT3..0 is  
cleared, pin change interrupt on the corresponding I/O pin is disabled.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
39  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
10. I/O Ports  
10.1 Overview  
All AVR ports have true Read-Modify-Write functionality when used as general digital I/O ports. This means that  
the direction of one port pin can be changed without unintentionally changing the direction of any other pin with the  
SBI and CBI instructions. The same applies when changing drive value (if configured as output) or enabling/dis-  
abling of pull-up resistors. Each output buffer has symmetrical drive characteristics with both high sink and source  
capability. The pin driver is strong enough to drive LED displays directly. All port pins have individually selectable  
pull-up resistors with a supply-voltage invariant resistance. All I/O pins have protection diodes to both VCC and  
Ground as indicated in Figure 10-1 on page 40. See “Electrical Characteristics” on page 115 for a complete list of  
parameters.  
Figure 10-1. I/O Pin Equivalent Schematic  
Rpu  
Pxn  
Logic  
Cpin  
See Figure  
"General Digital I/O" for  
Details  
All registers and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “x” represents the number-  
ing letter for the port, and a lower case “n” represents the bit number. However, when using the register or bit  
defines in a program, the precise form must be used. For example, PORTB3 for bit no. 3 in Port B, here docu-  
mented generally as PORTxn. The physical I/O Registers and bit locations are listed in “Register Description” on  
page 50.  
Four I/O memory address locations are allocated for each port, one each for the Data Register – PORTx, Data  
Direction Register – DDRx, Pull-up Enable Register – PUEx, and the Port Input Pins – PINx. The Port Input Pins  
I/O location is read only, while the Data Register, the Data Direction Register, and the Pull-up Enable Register are  
read/write. However, writing a logic one to a bit in the PINx Register, will result in a toggle in the corresponding bit  
in the Data Register.  
Using the I/O port as General Digital I/O is described in “Ports as General Digital I/O” on page 41. Most port pins  
are multiplexed with alternate functions for the peripheral features on the device. How each alternate function inter-  
feres with the port pin is described in “Alternate Port Functions” on page 45. Refer to the individual module sections  
for a full description of the alternate functions.  
Note that enabling the alternate function of some of the port pins does not affect the use of the other pins in the port  
as general digital I/O.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
40  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
10.2 Ports as General Digital I/O  
The ports are bi-directional I/O ports with optional internal pull-ups. Figure 10-2 shows a functional description of  
one I/O-port pin, here generically called Pxn.  
Figure 10-2. General Digital I/O(1)  
REx  
Q
D
PUExn  
Q
CLR  
RESET  
WEx  
Q
D
DDxn  
Q
CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
RESET  
1
0
Q
D
Pxn  
PORTxn  
Q
CLR  
RESET  
WPx  
WRx  
SLEEP  
RRx  
SYNCHRONIZER  
RPx  
D
Q
D
L
Q
Q
PINxn  
Q
clk I/O  
WEx:  
REx:  
WRITE PUEx  
READ PUEx  
WDx:  
RDx:  
WRx:  
RRx:  
RPx:  
WRITE DDRx  
READ DDRx  
SLEEP:  
clkI/O  
SLEEP CONTROL  
I/O CLOCK  
WRITE PORTx  
:
READ PORTx REGISTER  
READ PORTx PIN  
WRITE PINx REGISTER  
WPx:  
Note:  
1. WEx, WRx, WPx, WDx, REx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, and SLEEP  
are common to all ports.  
10.2.1  
Configuring the Pin  
Each port pin consists of four register bits: DDxn, PORTxn, PUExn, and PINxn. As shown in “Register Description”  
on page 50, the DDxn bits are accessed at the DDRx I/O address, the PORTxn bits at the PORTx I/O address, the  
PUExn bits at the PUEx I/O address, and the PINxn bits at the PINx I/O address.  
The DDxn bit in the DDRx Register selects the direction of this pin. If DDxn is written logic one, Pxn is configured  
as an output pin. If DDxn is written logic zero, Pxn is configured as an input pin.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
41  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
If PORTxn is written logic one when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven high (one). If  
PORTxn is written logic zero when the pin is configured as an output pin, the port pin is driven low (zero).  
The pull-up resistor is activated, if the PUExn is written logic one. To switch the pull-up resistor off, PUExn has to  
be written logic zero.  
Table 10-1 summarizes the control signals for the pin value.  
Table 10-1. Port Pin Configurations  
DDxn  
PORTxn  
PUExn I/O  
Pull-up Comment  
0
0
1
X
X
0
Input  
No  
Yes  
No  
Tri-state (hi-Z)  
0
1
0
Input  
Sources current if pulled low externally  
Output low (sink)  
Output  
NOT RECOMMENDED.  
Output low (sink) and internal pull-up active.  
Sources current through the internal pull-up  
resistor and consumes power constantly  
1
0
1
Output  
Yes  
1
1
1
1
Output  
Output  
No  
Output high (source)  
0
1
Yes  
Output high (source) and internal pull-up active  
Port pins are tri-stated when a reset condition becomes active, even when no clocks are running.  
10.2.2  
10.2.3  
Toggling the Pin  
Writing a logic one to PINxn toggles the value of PORTxn, independent on the value of DDRxn. Note that the SBI  
instruction can be used to toggle one single bit in a port.  
Break-Before-Make Switching  
In Break-Before-Make mode, switching the DDRxn bit from input to output introduces an immediate tri-state period  
lasting one system clock cycle, as indicated in Figure 10-3. For example, if the system clock is 4 MHz and the  
DDRxn is written to make an output, an immediate tri-state period of 250 ns is introduced before the value of  
PORTxn is seen on the port pin.  
To avoid glitches it is recommended that the maximum DDRxn toggle frequency is two system clock cycles. The  
Break-Before-Make mode applies to the entire port and it is activated by the BBMx bit. For more details, see  
“PORTCR – Port Control Register” on page 50.  
When switching the DDRxn bit from output to input no immediate tri-state period is introduced.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
42  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 10-3. Switching Between Input and Output in Break-Before-Make-Mode  
SYSTEM CLK  
0x02  
r16  
0x01  
r17  
out DDRx, r16  
nop  
out DDRx, r17  
INSTRUCTIONS  
PORTx  
0x55  
0x02  
tri-state  
0x01  
0x01  
DDRx  
Px0  
Px1  
tri-state  
tri-state  
intermediate tri-state cycle  
intermediate tri-state cycle  
10.2.4  
Reading the Pin Value  
Independent of the setting of Data Direction bit DDxn, the port pin can be read through the PINxn Register bit. As  
shown in Figure 10-2 on page 41, the PINxn Register bit and the preceding latch constitute a synchronizer. This is  
needed to avoid metastability if the physical pin changes value near the edge of the internal clock, but it also intro-  
duces a delay. Figure 10-4 shows a timing diagram of the synchronization when reading an externally applied pin  
value. The maximum and minimum propagation delays are denoted tpd,max and tpd,min respectively.  
Figure 10-4. Synchronization when Reading an Externally Applied Pin value  
SYSTEM CLK  
XXX  
XXX  
in r17, PINx  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SYNC LATCH  
PINxn  
0x00  
tpd, max  
0xFF  
r17  
tpd, min  
Consider the clock period starting shortly after the first falling edge of the system clock. The latch is closed when  
the clock is low, and goes transparent when the clock is high, as indicated by the shaded region of the “SYNC  
LATCH” signal. The signal value is latched when the system clock goes low. It is clocked into the PINxn Register at  
the succeeding positive clock edge. As indicated by the two arrows tpd,max and tpd,min, a single signal transition  
on the pin will be delayed between ½ and 1½ system clock period depending upon the time of assertion.  
When reading back a software assigned pin value, a nop instruction must be inserted as indicated in Figure 10-5  
on page 44. The out instruction sets the “SYNC LATCH” signal at the positive edge of the clock. In this case, the  
delay tpd through the synchronizer is one system clock period.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
43  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 10-5. Synchronization when Reading a Software Assigned Pin Value  
SYSTEM CLK  
0xFF  
r16  
out PORTx, r16  
nop  
in r17, PINx  
INSTRUCTIONS  
SYNC LATCH  
PINxn  
0x00  
tpd  
0xFF  
r17  
10.2.5  
Digital Input Enable and Sleep Modes  
As shown in Figure 10-2 on page 41, the digital input signal can be clamped to ground at the input of the schmitt-  
trigger. The signal denoted SLEEP in the figure, is set by the MCU Sleep Controller in Power-down and Standby  
modes to avoid high power consumption if some input signals are left floating, or have an analog signal level close  
to VCC/2.  
SLEEP is overridden for port pins enabled as external interrupt pins. If the external interrupt request is not enabled,  
SLEEP is active also for these pins. SLEEP is also overridden by various other alternate functions as described in  
“Alternate Port Functions” on page 45.  
If a logic high level (“one”) is present on an asynchronous external interrupt pin configured as “Interrupt on Rising  
Edge, Falling Edge, or Any Logic Change on Pin” while the external interrupt is not enabled, the corresponding  
External Interrupt Flag will be set when resuming from the above mentioned Sleep mode, as the clamping in these  
sleep mode produces the requested logic change.  
10.2.6  
Unconnected Pins  
If some pins are unused, it is recommended to ensure that these pins have a defined level. Even though most of  
the digital inputs are disabled in the deep sleep modes as described above, floating inputs should be avoided to  
reduce current consumption in all other modes where the digital inputs are enabled (Reset, Active mode and Idle  
mode).  
The simplest method to ensure a defined level of an unused pin, is to enable the internal pull-up. In this case, the  
pull-up will be disabled during reset. If low power consumption during reset is important, it is recommended to use  
an external pull-up or pulldown. Connecting unused pins directly to VCC or GND is not recommended, since this  
may cause excessive currents if the pin is accidentally configured as an output.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
44  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
10.2.7  
Program Example  
The following code example shows how to set port B pin 0 high, pin 1 low, and define the port pins from 2 to 3 as  
input with a pull-up assigned to port pin 2. The resulting pin values are read back again, but as previously dis-  
cussed, a nop instruction is included to be able to read back the value recently assigned to some of the pins.  
Assembly Code Example  
...  
; Define pull-ups and set outputs high  
; Define directions for port pins  
ldi r16,(1<<PUEB2)  
ldi r17,(1<<PB0)  
ldi r18,(1<<DDB1)|(1<<DDB0)  
out PUEB,r16  
out PORTB,r17  
out DDRB,r18  
; Insert nop for synchronization  
nop  
; Read port pins  
in  
r16,PINB  
...  
Note:  
See “Code Examples” on page 5.  
10.3 Alternate Port Functions  
Most port pins have alternate functions in addition to being general digital I/Os. In Figure 10-6 below is shown how  
the port pin control signals from the simplified Figure 10-2 on page 41 can be overridden by alternate functions.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
45  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 10-6. Alternate Port Functions(1)  
PUOExn  
PUOVxn  
REx  
1
0
Q
D
PUExn  
Q
CLR  
DDOExn  
DDOVxn  
RESET  
WEx  
1
0
Q
D
DDxn  
Q
CLR  
WDx  
RDx  
PVOExn  
PVOVxn  
RESET  
1
1
0
Pxn  
Q
D
0
PORTxn  
PTOExn  
Q
CLR  
DIEOExn  
DIEOVxn  
SLEEP  
WPx  
RESET  
WRx  
1
0
RRx  
SYNCHRONIZER  
RPx  
SET  
D
Q
D
L
Q
Q
PINxn  
Q
CLR  
CLR  
clk  
I/O  
DIxn  
AIOxn  
WEx:  
REx:  
WDx:  
RDx:  
RRx:  
WRx:  
RPx:  
WPx:  
WRITE PUEx  
READ PUEx  
WRITE DDRx  
READ DDRx  
READ PORTx REGISTER  
WRITE PORTx  
READ PORTx PIN  
WRITE PINx  
I/O CLOCK  
DIGITAL INPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
ANALOG INPUT/OUTPUT PIN n ON PORTx  
PUOExn:  
PUOVxn:  
DDOExn:  
DDOVxn:  
PVOExn:  
PVOVxn:  
DIEOExn:  
Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Pxn PULL-UP OVERRIDE VALUE  
Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Pxn DATA DIRECTION OVERRIDE VALUE  
Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Pxn PORT VALUE OVERRIDE VALUE  
Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
DIEOVxn: Pxn DIGITAL INPUT-ENABLE OVERRIDE VALUE  
SLEEP:  
PTOExn:  
clkI/O  
DIxn:  
AIOxn:  
:
SLEEP CONTROL  
Pxn, PORT TOGGLE OVERRIDE ENABLE  
Note:  
1. WEx, WRx, WPx, WDx, REx, RRx, RPx, and RDx are common to all pins within the same port. clkI/O, and SLEEP  
are common to all ports. All other signals are unique for each pin.  
The illustration in the figure above serves as a generic description applicable to all port pins in the AVR microcon-  
troller family. Some overriding signals may not be present in all port pins.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
46  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 10-2 on page 47 summarizes the function of the overriding signals. The pin and port indexes from Figure 10-  
6 on page 46 are not shown in the succeeding tables. The overriding signals are generated internally in the mod-  
ules having the alternate function.  
Table 10-2. Generic Description of Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions  
Signal Name  
Full Name  
Description  
If this signal is set, the pull-up enable is controlled by the PUOV  
signal. If this signal is cleared, the pull-up is enabled when  
PUExn = 0b1.  
Pull-up Override  
Enable  
PUOE  
Pull-up Override  
Value  
If PUOE is set, the pull-up is enabled/disabled when PUOV is  
set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the PUExn Register bit.  
PUOV  
DDOE  
If this signal is set, the Output Driver Enable is controlled by the  
DDOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Output driver is  
enabled by the DDxn Register bit.  
Data Direction  
Override Enable  
If DDOE is set, the Output Driver is enabled/disabled when  
DDOV is set/cleared, regardless of the setting of the DDxn  
Register bit.  
Data Direction  
Override Value  
DDOV  
PVOE  
If this signal is set and the Output Driver is enabled, the port  
value is controlled by the PVOV signal. If PVOE is cleared, and  
the Output Driver is enabled, the port Value is controlled by the  
PORTxn Register bit.  
Port Value  
Override Enable  
Port Value  
Override Value  
If PVOE is set, the port value is set to PVOV, regardless of the  
setting of the PORTxn Register bit.  
PVOV  
PTOE  
Port Toggle  
Override Enable  
If PTOE is set, the PORTxn Register bit is inverted.  
Digital Input  
Enable Override  
Enable  
If this bit is set, the Digital Input Enable is controlled by the  
DIEOV signal. If this signal is cleared, the Digital Input Enable  
is determined by MCU state (Normal mode, sleep mode).  
DIEOE  
DIEOV  
Digital Input  
Enable Override  
Value  
If DIEOE is set, the Digital Input is enabled/disabled when  
DIEOV is set/cleared, regardless of the MCU state (Normal  
mode, sleep mode).  
This is the Digital Input to alternate functions. In the figure, the  
signal is connected to the output of the schmitt-trigger but  
before the synchronizer. Unless the Digital Input is used as a  
clock source, the module with the alternate function will use its  
own synchronizer.  
DI  
Digital Input  
This is the Analog Input/Output to/from alternate functions. The  
signal is connected directly to the pad, and can be used bi-  
directionally.  
Analog  
Input/Output  
AIO  
The following subsections shortly describe the alternate functions for each port, and relate the overriding signals to  
the alternate function. Refer to the alternate function description for further details.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
47  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
10.3.1  
Alternate Functions of Port B  
The Port B pins with alternate function are shown in Table 10-3 on page 48.  
Table 10-3. Port B Pins Alternate Functions  
Port Pin  
Alternate Function  
ADC0: ADC Input Channel 0  
AIN0:  
Analog Comparator, Positive Input  
PB0  
OC0A: Timer/Counter0 Compare Match A Output  
PCINT0: Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 0  
TPIDATA:Serial Programming Data  
ADC1: ADC Input Channel 1  
AIN1:  
CLKI:  
ICP0:  
Analog Comparator, Negative Input  
External Clock  
PB1  
Timer/Counter0 Input Capture Input  
OC0B: Timer/Counter0 Compare Match B Output  
PCINT1:Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 1  
TPICLK: Serial Programming Clock  
ADC2: ADC Input Channel 2  
CLKO: System Clock Output  
PB2  
PB3  
INT0:  
PCINT2: Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 2  
T0: Timer/Counter0 Clock Source  
External Interrupt 0 Source  
ADC3: ADC Input Channel 3  
PCINT3: Pin Change Interrupt 0, Source 3  
RESET: Reset Pin  
• Port B, Bit 0 – ADC0/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0/TPIDATA  
• ADC0: Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 0 (ATtiny5/10, only)  
• AIN0: Analog Comparator Positive Input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up switched off to  
avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the Analog Comparator.  
• OC0A, Output Compare Match output: The PB0 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0  
Compare Match A. The pin has to be configured as an output (DDB0 set (one)) to serve this function. This is  
also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
• PCINT0: Pin Change Interrupt source 0. The PB0 pin can serve as an external interrupt source for pin change  
interrupt 0.  
• TPIDATA: Serial Programming Data.  
• Port B, Bit 1 – ADC1/AIN1/CLKI/ICP0/OC0B/PCINT1/TPICLK  
• ADC1: Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 1 (ATtiny5/10, only)  
• AIN1: Analog Comparator Negative Input. Configure the port pin as input with the internal pull-up switched off to  
avoid the digital port function from interfering with the function of the Analog Comparator.  
• CLKI: External Clock.  
• ICP0: Input Capture Pin. The PB1 pin can act as an Input Capture pin for Timer/Counter0.  
• OC0B: Output Compare Match output: The PB1 pin can serve as an external output for the Timer/Counter0  
Compare Match B. The PB1 pin has to be configured as an output (DDB1 set (one)) to serve this function. The  
OC0B pin is also the output pin for the PWM mode timer function.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
48  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• PCINT1: Pin Change Interrupt source 1. The PB1 pin can serve as an external interrupt source for pin change  
interrupt 0.  
• TPICLK: Serial Programming Clock.  
• Port B, Bit 2 – ADC2/CLKO/INT0/PCINT2/T0  
• ADC2: Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 2 (ATtiny5/10, only)  
• CLKO: System Clock Output. The system clock can be output on pin PB2. The system clock will be output if  
CKOUT bit is programmed, regardless of the PORTB2 and DDB2 settings.  
• INT0: External Interrupt Request 0  
• PCINT2: Pin Change Interrupt source 2. The PB2 pin can serve as an external interrupt source for pin change  
interrupt 0.  
• T0: Timer/Counter0 counter source.  
• Port B, Bit 3 – ADC3/PCINT3/RESET  
• ADC3: Analog to Digital Converter, Channel 3 (ATtiny5/10, only)  
• PCINT3: Pin Change Interrupt source 3. The PB3 pin can serve as an external interrupt source for pin change  
interrupt 0.  
• RESET:  
Table 10-4 and Table 10-5 on page 50 relate the alternate functions of Port B to the overriding signals shown in  
Figure 10-6 on page 46.  
Table 10-4. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB3..PB2  
Signal  
Name  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
PTOE  
PB3/ADC3/RESET/PCINT3  
PB2/ADC2/INT0/T0/CLKO/PCINT2  
RSTDISBL(1)  
CKOUT(2)  
1
0
RSTDISBL(1)  
CKOUT(2)  
0
0
0
0
1
CKOUT(2)  
(system clock)  
0
RSTDISBL(1) + (PCINT3 • PCIE0) +  
ADC3D  
DIEOE  
(PCINT2 • PCIE0) + ADC2D + INT0  
DIEOV  
DI  
RSTDISBL • PCINT3 • PCIE0  
PCINT3 Input  
(PCINT2 • PCIE0) + INT0  
INT0/T0/PCINT2 Input  
ADC2 Input  
AIO  
ADC3 Input  
Notes: 1. RSTDISBL is 1 when the configuration bit is “0” (Programmed).  
2. CKOUT is 1 when the configuration bit is “0” (Programmed).  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
49  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 10-5. Overriding Signals for Alternate Functions in PB1..PB0  
Signal  
Name  
PUOE  
PUOV  
DDOE  
DDOV  
PVOE  
PVOV  
PTOE  
PB1/ADC1/AIN1/OC0B/CLKI/ICP0/PCINT1 PB0/ADC0/AIN0/OC0A/PCINT0  
EXT_CLOCK(1)  
0
0
0
EXT_CLOCK(1)  
0
0
0
EXT_CLOCK(1) + OC0B Enable  
OC0A Enable  
EXT_CLOCK(1) • OC0B  
OC0A  
0
0
EXT_CLOCK(1) + (PCINT1 • PCIE0) +  
ADC1D  
DIEOE  
DIEOV  
(PCINT0 • PCIE0) + ADC0D  
PCINT0 • PCIE0  
(EXT_CLOCK(1) • PWR_DOWN) +  
(EXT_CLOCK(1) • PCINT1 • PCIE0)  
DI  
CLOCK/ICP0/PCINT1 Input  
PCINT0 Input  
AIO  
ADC1/Analog Comparator Negative Input  
ADC0/Analog Comparator Positive Input  
Notes: 1. EXT_CLOCK is 1 when external clock is selected as main clock.  
10.4 Register Description  
10.4.1  
PORTCR – Port Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
BBMB  
R/W  
0
0
0x03  
PORTCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:2, 0 – Reserved  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 1 – BBMB: Break-Before-Make Mode Enable  
When this bit is set the Break-Before-Make mode is activated for the entire Port B. The intermediate tri-state cycle  
is then inserted when writing DDRxn to make an output. For further information, see “Break-Before-Make Switch-  
ing” on page 42.  
10.4.2  
PUEB – Port B Pull-up Enable Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
PUEB3  
R/W  
0
2
PUEB2  
R/W  
0
1
PUEB1  
R/W  
0
0
PUEB0  
R/W  
0
0x03  
PUEB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
50  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
10.4.3  
10.4.4  
10.4.5  
PORTB – Port B Data Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
PORTB3  
R/W  
2
PORTB2  
R/W  
1
PORTB1  
R/W  
0
PORTB0  
R/W  
0x02  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
0
0
DDRB – Port B Data Direction Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
DDB3  
R/W  
0
2
DDB2  
R/W  
0
1
DDB1  
R/W  
0
0
DDB0  
R/W  
0
0x01  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
PINB – Port B Input Pins  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x00  
PINB3  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB2  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB1  
R/W  
N/A  
PINB0  
R/W  
N/A  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
51  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
11. 16-bit Timer/Counter0  
11.1 Features  
True 16-bit Design, Including 16-bit PWM  
Two Independent Output Compare Units  
Double Buffered Output Compare Registers  
One Input Capture Unit  
Input Capture Noise Canceler  
Clear Timer on Compare Match (Auto Reload)  
Glitch-free, Phase Correct Pulse Width Modulator (PWM)  
Variable PWM Period  
Frequency Generator  
External Event Counter  
Four independent interrupt Sources (TOV0, OCF0A, OCF0B, and ICF0)  
11.2 Overview  
The 16-bit Timer/Counter unit allows accurate program execution timing (event management), wave generation,  
and signal timing measurement.  
Figure 11-1. 16-bit Timer/Counter Block Diagram  
Count  
TOVn  
(Int.Req.)  
Clear  
Control Logic  
Clock Select  
Direction  
clkTn  
Edge  
Detector  
Tn  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
( From Prescaler )  
Timer/Counter  
TCNTn  
=
= 0  
OCnA  
(Int.Req.)  
Waveform  
Generation  
OCnA  
OCnB  
=
OCRnA  
OCnB  
(Int.Req.)  
Fixed  
TOP  
Values  
Waveform  
Generation  
=
OCRnB  
( From Analog  
Comparator Ouput )  
ICFn (Int.Req.)  
Edge  
Detector  
Noise  
Canceler  
ICRn  
ICPn  
TCCRnA  
TCCRnB  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
52  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
A simplified block diagram of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is shown in Figure 11-1 on page 52. For actual placement of  
I/O pins, refer to “Pinout of ATtiny4/5/9/10” on page 2. CPU accessible I/O Registers, including I/O bits and I/O  
pins, are shown in bold. The device-specific I/O Register and bit locations are listed in the “Register Description” on  
page 72.  
Most register and bit references in this section are written in general form. A lower case “n” replaces the  
Timer/Counter number, and a lower case “x” replaces the Output Compare unit channel. However, when using the  
register or bit defines in a program, the precise form must be used, i.e., TCNT0 for accessing Timer/Counter0  
counter value and so on.  
11.2.1  
Registers  
The Timer/Counter (TCNT0), Output Compare Registers (OCR0A/B), and Input Capture Register (ICR0) are all  
16-bit registers. Special procedures must be followed when accessing the 16-bit registers. These procedures are  
described in the section “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 70. The Timer/Counter Control Registers  
(TCCR0A/B) are 8-bit registers and have no CPU access restrictions. Interrupt requests (abbreviated to Int.Req. in  
the figure) signals are all visible in the Timer Interrupt Flag Register (TIFR). All interrupts are individually masked  
with the Timer Interrupt Mask Register (TIMSK). TIFR and TIMSK are not shown in the figure.  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked internally, via the prescaler, or by an external clock source on the T0 pin. The  
Clock Select logic block controls which clock source and edge the Timer/Counter uses to increment (or decrement)  
its value. The Timer/Counter is inactive when no clock source is selected. The output from the Clock Select logic is  
referred to as the timer clock (clkT0).  
The double buffered Output Compare Registers (OCR0A/B) are compared with the Timer/Counter value at all time.  
The result of the compare can be used by the Waveform Generator to generate a PWM or variable frequency out-  
put on the Output Compare pin (OC0A/B). See “Output Compare Units” on page 58. The compare match event will  
also set the Compare Match Flag (OCF0A/B) which can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt request.  
The Input Capture Register can capture the Timer/Counter value at a given external (edge triggered) event on  
either the Input Capture pin (ICP0) or on the Analog Comparator pins (See “Analog Comparator” on page 80). The  
Input Capture unit includes a digital filtering unit (Noise Canceler) for reducing the chance of capturing noise  
spikes.  
The TOP value, or maximum Timer/Counter value, can in some modes of operation be defined by either the  
OCR0A Register, the ICR0 Register, or by a set of fixed values. When using OCR0A as TOP value in a PWM  
mode, the OCR0A Register can not be used for generating a PWM output. However, the TOP value will in this  
case be double buffered allowing the TOP value to be changed in run time. If a fixed TOP value is required, the  
ICR0 Register can be used as an alternative, freeing the OCR0A to be used as PWM output.  
11.2.2  
Definitions  
The following definitions are used extensively throughout the section:  
Table 11-1. Definitions  
Constant  
BOTTOM  
MAX  
Description  
The counter reaches BOTTOM when it becomes 0x00  
The counter reaches its MAXimum when it becomes 0xFF (decimal 255)  
The counter reaches the TOP when it becomes equal to the highest value in the count  
sequence. The TOP value can be assigned to be the fixed value 0xFF (MAX) or the  
value stored in the OCR0A Register. The assignment depends on the mode of operation  
TOP  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
53  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
11.3 Clock Sources  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked by an internal or an external clock source. The clock source is selected by the  
Clock Select logic which is controlled by the Clock Select (CS02:0) bits located in the Timer/Counter control Regis-  
ter B (TCCR0B). For details on clock sources and prescaler, see section “Prescaler”.  
11.3.1  
Prescaler  
The Timer/Counter can be clocked directly by the system clock (by setting the CS2:0 = 1). This provides the fastest  
operation, with a maximum Timer/Counter clock frequency equal to system clock frequency (fCLK_I/O). Alternatively,  
one of four taps from the prescaler can be used as a clock source.  
See Figure 11-2 for an illustration of the prescaler unit.  
Figure 11-2. Prescaler for Timer/Counter0  
clkI/O  
Clear  
PSR10  
T0  
Synchronization  
clkT0  
Note:  
1. The synchronization logic on the input pins (T0) is shown in Figure 11-3 on page 55.  
The prescaled clock has a frequency of fCLK_I/O/8, fCLK_I/O/64, fCLK_I/O/256, or fCLK_I/O/1024. See Table 11-6 on page  
75 for details.  
11.3.1.1  
Prescaler Reset  
The prescaler is free running, i.e., operates independently of the Clock Select logic of the Timer/CounterCounter,  
and it is shared by the Timer/Counter Tn. Since the prescaler is not affected by the Timer/Counter’s clock select,  
the state of the prescaler will have implications for situations where a prescaled clock is used. One example of  
prescaling artifacts occurs when the timer is enabled and clocked by the prescaler (CS2:0 = 2, 3, 4, or 5). The num-  
ber of system clock cycles from when the timer is enabled to the first count occurs can be from 1 to N+1 system  
clock cycles, where N equals the prescaler divisor (8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
It is possible to use the Prescaler Reset for synchronizing the Timer/Counter to program execution.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
54  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
11.3.2  
External Clock Source  
An external clock source applied to the T0 pin can be used as Timer/Counter clock (clkTn). The Tn pin is sampled  
once every system clock cycle by the pin synchronization logic. The synchronized (sampled) signal is then passed  
through the edge detector. Figure 11-3 on page 55 shows a functional equivalent block diagram of the T0 synchro-  
nization and edge detector logic. The registers are clocked at the positive edge of the internal system clock (clkI/O).  
The latch is transparent in the high period of the internal system clock.  
The edge detector generates one clkT0 pulse for each positive (CS2:0 = 7) or negative (CS2:0 = 6) edge it detects.  
Figure 11-3. T0 Pin Sampling  
Tn_sync  
(To Clock  
Tn  
D
Q
D
Q
D
Q
Select Logic)  
LE  
clkI/O  
Synchronization  
Edge Detector  
The synchronization and edge detector logic introduces a delay of 2.5 to 3.5 system clock cycles from an edge has  
been applied to the T0 pin to the counter is updated.  
Enabling and disabling of the clock input must be done when T0 has been stable for at least one system clock  
cycle, otherwise it is a risk that a false Timer/Counter clock pulse is generated.  
Each half period of the external clock applied must be longer than one system clock cycle to ensure correct sam-  
pling. The external clock must be guaranteed to have less than half the system clock frequency (fExtClk < fclk_I/O/2)  
given a 50/50% duty cycle. Since the edge detector uses sampling, the maximum frequency of an external clock it  
can detect is half the sampling frequency (Nyquist sampling theorem). However, due to variation of the system  
clock frequency and duty cycle caused by oscillator source (crystal, resonator, and capacitors) tolerances, it is rec-  
ommended that maximum frequency of an external clock source is less than fclk_I/O/2.5.  
An external clock source can not be prescaled.  
11.4 Counter Unit  
The main part of the 16-bit Timer/Counter is the programmable 16-bit bi-directional counter unit. Figure 11-4 on  
page 55 shows a block diagram of the counter and its surroundings.  
Figure 11-4. Counter Unit Block Diagram  
DATA BUS (8-bit)  
TOVn  
(Int.Req.)  
TEMP (8-bit)  
Clock Select  
Count  
Clear  
Edge  
Detector  
Tn  
TCNTnH (8-bit)  
TCNTnL (8-bit)  
clkTn  
Control Logic  
Direction  
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)  
( From Prescaler )  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
Signal description (internal signals):  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
55  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Count  
Direction  
Clear  
Increment or decrement TCNT0 by 1.  
Select between increment and decrement.  
Clear TCNT0 (set all bits to zero).  
clkT  
Timer/Counter clock.  
0
TOP  
BOTTOM  
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached maximum value.  
Signalize that TCNT0 has reached minimum value (zero).  
The 16-bit counter is mapped into two 8-bit I/O memory locations: Counter High (TCNT0H) containing the upper  
eight bits of the counter, and Counter Low (TCNT0L) containing the lower eight bits. The TCNT0H Register can  
only be indirectly accessed by the CPU. When the CPU does an access to the TCNT0H I/O location, the CPU  
accesses the high byte temporary register (TEMP). The temporary register is updated with the TCNT0H value  
when the TCNT0L is read, and TCNT0H is updated with the temporary register value when TCNT0L is written. This  
allows the CPU to read or write the entire 16-bit counter value within one clock cycle via the 8-bit data bus. It is  
important to notice that there are special cases of writing to the TCNT0 Register when the counter is counting that  
will give unpredictable results. The special cases are described in the sections where they are of importance.  
Depending on the mode of operation used, the counter is cleared, incremented, or decremented at each timer  
clock (clk ). The clk 0 can be generated from an external or internal clock source, selected by the Clock Select bits  
0
T
T
(CS02:0). When no clock source is selected (CS02:0 = 0) the timer is stopped. However, the TCNT0 value can be  
accessed by the CPU, independent of whether clkT0 is present or not. A CPU write overrides (has priority over) all  
counter clear or count operations.  
The counting sequence is determined by the setting of the Waveform Generation mode bits (WGM03:0) located in  
the Timer/Counter Control Registers A and B (TCCR0A and TCCR0B). There are close connections between how  
the counter behaves (counts) and how waveforms are generated on the Output Compare outputs OC0x. For more  
details about advanced counting sequences and waveform generation, see “Modes of Operation” on page 61.  
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set according to the mode of operation selected by the WGM03:0 bits.  
TOV0 can be used for generating a CPU interrupt.  
11.5 Input Capture Unit  
The Timer/Counter incorporates an Input Capture unit that can capture external events and give them a time-  
stamp indicating time of occurrence. The external signal indicating an event, or multiple events, can be applied via  
the ICP0 pin. The time-stamps can then be used to calculate frequency, duty-cycle, and other features of the signal  
applied. Alternatively the time-stamps can be used for creating a log of the events.  
The Input Capture unit is illustrated by the block diagram shown in Figure 11-5 on page 57. The elements of the  
block diagram that are not directly a part of the Input Capture unit are gray shaded. The lower case “n” in register  
and bit names indicates the Timer/Counter number.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
56  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 11-5. Input Capture Unit Block Diagram  
DATA BUS (8-bit)  
TEMP (8-bit)  
ICRnH (8-bit)  
ICRnL (8-bit)  
TCNTnH (8-bit)  
TCNTnL (8-bit)  
ICRn (16-bit Register)  
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)  
WRITE  
ACO*  
ACIC*  
ICNC  
ICES  
Analog  
Comparator  
Noise  
Canceler  
Edge  
Detector  
ICFn (Int.Req.)  
ICPn  
When a change of the logic level (an event) occurs on the Input Capture pin (ICP0), alternatively on the Analog  
Comparator output (ACO), and this change confirms to the setting of the edge detector, a capture will be triggered.  
When a capture is triggered, the 16-bit value of the counter (TCNT0) is written to the Input Capture Register  
(ICR0). The Input Capture Flag (ICF0) is set at the same system clock as the TCNT0 value is copied into ICR0  
Register. If enabled (ICIE0 = 1), the Input Capture Flag generates an Input Capture interrupt. The ICF0 flag is auto-  
matically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the ICF0 flag can be cleared by software by writing a  
logical one to its I/O bit location.  
Reading the 16-bit value in the Input Capture Register (ICR0) is done by first reading the low byte (ICR0L) and  
then the high byte (ICR0H). When the low byte is read the high byte is copied into the high byte temporary register  
(TEMP). When the CPU reads the ICR0H I/O location it will access the TEMP Register.  
The ICR0 Register can only be written when using a Waveform Generation mode that utilizes the ICR0 Register for  
defining the counter’s TOP value. In these cases the Waveform Generation mode (WGM03:0) bits must be set  
before the TOP value can be written to the ICR0 Register. When writing the ICR0 Register the high byte must be  
written to the ICR0H I/O location before the low byte is written to ICR0L.  
For more information on how to access the 16-bit registers refer to “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 70.  
11.5.1  
Input Capture Trigger Source  
The main trigger source for the Input Capture unit is the Input Capture pin (ICP0). Timer/Counter0 can alternatively  
use the Analog Comparator output as trigger source for the Input Capture unit. The Analog Comparator is selected  
as trigger source by setting the Analog Comparator Input Capture (ACIC) bit in “ACSR – Analog Comparator Con-  
trol and Status Register”. Be aware that changing trigger source can trigger a capture. The Input Capture Flag  
must therefore be cleared after the change.  
Both the Input Capture pin (ICP0) and the Analog Comparator output (ACO) inputs are sampled using the same  
technique as for the T0 pin (Figure 11-3 on page 55). The edge detector is also identical. However, when the noise  
canceler is enabled, additional logic is inserted before the edge detector, which increases the delay by four system  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
57  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
clock cycles. Note that the input of the noise canceler and edge detector is always enabled unless the Timer/Coun-  
ter is set in a Waveform Generation mode that uses ICR0 to define TOP.  
An Input Capture can be triggered by software by controlling the port of the ICP0 pin.  
11.5.2  
Noise Canceler  
The noise canceler improves noise immunity by using a simple digital filtering scheme. The noise canceler input is  
monitored over four samples, and all four must be equal for changing the output that in turn is used by the edge  
detector.  
The noise canceler is enabled by setting the Input Capture Noise Canceler (ICNC0) bit in Timer/Counter Control  
Register B (TCCR0B). When enabled the noise canceler introduces additional four system clock cycles of delay  
from a change applied to the input, to the update of the ICR0 Register. The noise canceler uses the system clock  
and is therefore not affected by the prescaler.  
11.5.3  
Using the Input Capture Unit  
The main challenge when using the Input Capture unit is to assign enough processor capacity for handling the  
incoming events. The time between two events is critical. If the processor has not read the captured value in the  
ICR0 Register before the next event occurs, the ICR0 will be overwritten with a new value. In this case the result of  
the capture will be incorrect.  
When using the Input Capture interrupt, the ICR0 Register should be read as early in the interrupt handler routine  
as possible. Even though the Input Capture interrupt has relatively high priority, the maximum interrupt response  
time is dependent on the maximum number of clock cycles it takes to handle any of the other interrupt requests.  
Using the Input Capture unit in any mode of operation when the TOP value (resolution) is actively changed during  
operation, is not recommended.  
Measurement of an external signal’s duty cycle requires that the trigger edge is changed after each capture.  
Changing the edge sensing must be done as early as possible after the ICR0 Register has been read. After a  
change of the edge, the Input Capture Flag (ICF0) must be cleared by software (writing a logical one to the I/O bit  
location). For measuring frequency only, the clearing of the ICF0 flag is not required (if an interrupt handler is  
used).  
11.6 Output Compare Units  
The 16-bit comparator continuously compares TCNT0 with the Output Compare Register (OCR0x). If TCNT equals  
OCR0x the comparator signals a match. A match will set the Output Compare Flag (OCF0x) at the next timer clock  
cycle. If enabled (OCIE0x = 1), the Output Compare Flag generates an Output Compare interrupt. The OCF0x flag  
is automatically cleared when the interrupt is executed. Alternatively the OCF0x flag can be cleared by software by  
writing a logical one to its I/O bit location. The Waveform Generator uses the match signal to generate an output  
according to operating mode set by the Waveform Generation mode (WGM03:0) bits and Compare Output mode  
(COM0x1:0) bits. The TOP and BOTTOM signals are used by the Waveform Generator for handling the special  
cases of the extreme values in some modes of operation (“Modes of Operation” on page 61).  
A special feature of Output Compare unit A allows it to define the Timer/Counter TOP value (i.e., counter resolu-  
tion). In addition to the counter resolution, the TOP value defines the period time for waveforms generated by the  
Waveform Generator.  
Figure 11-6 on page 59 shows a block diagram of the Output Compare unit. The small “n” in the register and bit  
names indicates the device number (n = 0 for Timer/Counter 0), and the “x” indicates Output Compare unit (A/B).  
The elements of the block diagram that are not directly a part of the Output Compare unit are gray shaded.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
58  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 11-6. Output Compare Unit, Block Diagram  
DATA BUS (8-bit)  
TEMP (8-bit)  
OCRnxH Buf. (8-bit)  
OCRnxL Buf. (8-bit)  
TCNTnH (8-bit)  
TCNTnL (8-bit)  
OCRnx Buffer (16-bit Register)  
TCNTn (16-bit Counter)  
OCRnxH (8-bit)  
OCRnxL (8-bit)  
OCRnx (16-bit Register)  
=
(16-bit Comparator )  
OCFnx (Int.Req.)  
TOP  
OCnx  
Waveform Generator  
BOTTOM  
WGMn3:0  
COMnx1:0  
The OCR0x Register is double buffered when using any of the twelve Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. For  
the Normal and Clear Timer on Compare (CTC) modes of operation, the double buffering is disabled. The double  
buffering synchronizes the update of the OCR0x Compare Register to either TOP or BOTTOM of the counting  
sequence. The synchronization prevents the occurrence of odd-length, non-symmetrical PWM pulses, thereby  
making the output glitch-free.  
The OCR0x Register access may seem complex, but this is not case. When the double buffering is enabled, the  
CPU has access to the OCR0x Buffer Register, and if double buffering is disabled the CPU will access the OCR0x  
directly. The content of the OCR0x (Buffer or Compare) Register is only changed by a write operation (the  
Timer/Counter does not update this register automatically as the TCNT0 and ICR0 Register). Therefore OCR0x is  
not read via the high byte temporary register (TEMP). However, it is a good practice to read the low byte first as  
when accessing other 16-bit registers. Writing the OCR0x Registers must be done via the TEMP Register since the  
compare of all 16 bits is done continuously. The high byte (OCR0xH) has to be written first. When the high byte I/O  
location is written by the CPU, the TEMP Register will be updated by the value written. Then when the low byte  
(OCR0xL) is written to the lower eight bits, the high byte will be copied into the upper 8-bits of either the OCR0x  
buffer or OCR0x Compare Register in the same system clock cycle.  
For more information of how to access the 16-bit registers refer to “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 70.  
11.6.1  
Force Output Compare  
In non-PWM Waveform Generation modes, the match output of the comparator can be forced by writing a one to  
the Force Output Compare (0x) bit. Forcing compare match will not set the OCF0x flag or reload/clear the timer,  
but the OC0x pin will be updated as if a real compare match had occurred (the COM01:0 bits settings define  
whether the OC0x pin is set, cleared or toggled).  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
59  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
11.6.2  
11.6.3  
Compare Match Blocking by TCNT0 Write  
All CPU writes to the TCNT0 Register will block any compare match that occurs in the next timer clock cycle, even  
when the timer is stopped. This feature allows OCR0x to be initialized to the same value as TCNT0 without trigger-  
ing an interrupt when the Timer/Counter clock is enabled.  
Using the Output Compare Unit  
Since writing TCNT0 in any mode of operation will block all compare matches for one timer clock cycle, there are  
risks involved when changing TCNT0 when using any of the Output Compare channels, independent of whether  
the Timer/Counter is running or not. If the value written to TCNT0 equals the OCR0x value, the compare match will  
be missed, resulting in incorrect waveform generation. Do not write the TCNT0 equal to TOP in PWM modes with  
variable TOP values. The compare match for the TOP will be ignored and the counter will continue to 0xFFFF.  
Similarly, do not write the TCNT0 value equal to BOTTOM when the counter is downcounting.  
The setup of the OC0x should be performed before setting the Data Direction Register for the port pin to output.  
The easiest way of setting the OC0x value is to use the Force Output Compare (0x) strobe bits in Normal mode.  
The OC0x Register keeps its value even when changing between Waveform Generation modes.  
Be aware that the COM0x1:0 bits are not double buffered together with the compare value. Changing the  
COM0x1:0 bits will take effect immediately.  
11.7 Compare Match Output Unit  
The Compare Output Mode (COM0x1:0) bits have two functions. The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0  
bits for defining the Output Compare (OC0x) state at the next compare match. Secondly the COM0x1:0 bits control  
the OC0x pin output source. Figure 11-7 on page 61 shows a simplified schematic of the logic affected by the  
COM0x1:0 bit setting. The I/O Registers, I/O bits, and I/O pins in the figure are shown in bold. Only the parts of the  
general I/O port control registers (DDR and PORT) that are affected by the COM0x1:0 bits are shown. When refer-  
ring to the OC0x state, the reference is for the internal OC0x Register, not the OC0x pin. If a system reset occur,  
the OC0x Register is reset to “0”.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
60  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 11-7. Compare Match Output Unit, Schematic (non-PWM Mode)  
COMnx1  
Waveform  
Generator  
COMnx0  
FOCnx  
D
Q
1
0
OCnx  
Pin  
OCnx  
D
Q
PORT  
D
Q
DDR  
clkI/O  
The general I/O port function is overridden by the Output Compare (OC0x) from the Waveform Generator if either  
of the COM0x1:0 bits are set. However, the OC0x pin direction (input or output) is still controlled by the Data Direc-  
tion Register (DDR) for the port pin. The Data Direction Register bit for the OC0x pin (DDR_OC0x) must be set as  
output before the OC0x value is visible on the pin. The port override function is generally independent of the Wave-  
form Generation mode, but there are some exceptions. See Table 11-2 on page 73, Table 11-3 on page 73 and  
Table 11-4 on page 73 for details.  
The design of the Output Compare pin logic allows initialization of the OC0x state before the output is enabled.  
Note that some COM0x1:0 bit settings are reserved for certain modes of operation. See “Register Description” on  
page 72  
The COM0x1:0 bits have no effect on the Input Capture unit.  
11.7.1  
Compare Output Mode and Waveform Generation  
The Waveform Generator uses the COM0x1:0 bits differently in normal, CTC, and PWM modes. For all modes,  
setting the COM0x1:0 = 0 tells the Waveform Generator that no action on the OC0x Register is to be performed on  
the next compare match. For compare output actions in the non-PWM modes refer to Table 11-2 on page 73. For  
fast PWM mode refer to Table 11-3 on page 73, and for phase correct and phase and frequency correct PWM refer  
to Table 11-4 on page 73.  
A change of the COM0x1:0 bits state will have effect at the first compare match after the bits are written. For non-  
PWM modes, the action can be forced to have immediate effect by using the 0x strobe bits.  
11.8 Modes of Operation  
The mode of operation, i.e., the behavior of the Timer/Counter and the Output Compare pins, is defined by the  
combination of the Waveform Generation mode (WGM03:0) and Compare Output mode (COM0x1:0) bits. The  
Compare Output mode bits do not affect the counting sequence, while the Waveform Generation mode bits do.  
The COM0x1:0 bits control whether the PWM output generated should be inverted or not (inverted or non-inverted  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
61  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
PWM). For non-PWM modes the COM0x1:0 bits control whether the output should be set, cleared or toggle at a  
compare match (“Compare Match Output Unit” on page 60)  
For detailed timing information refer to “Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams” on page 69.  
11.8.1  
Normal Mode  
The simplest mode of operation is the Normal mode (WGM03:0 = 0). In this mode the counting direction is always  
up (incrementing), and no counter clear is performed. The counter simply overruns when it passes its maximum  
16-bit value (MAX = 0xFFFF) and then restarts from the BOTTOM (0x0000). In normal operation the Timer/Coun-  
ter Overflow Flag (TOV0) will be set in the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 becomes zero. The TOV0 flag in  
this case behaves like a 17th bit, except that it is only set, not cleared. However, combined with the timer overflow  
interrupt that automatically clears the TOV0 flag, the timer resolution can be increased by software. There are no  
special cases to consider in the Normal mode, a new counter value can be written anytime.  
The Input Capture unit is easy to use in Normal mode. However, observe that the maximum interval between the  
external events must not exceed the resolution of the counter. If the interval between events are too long, the timer  
overflow interrupt or the prescaler must be used to extend the resolution for the capture unit.  
The Output Compare units can be used to generate interrupts at some given time. Using the Output Compare to  
generate waveforms in Normal mode is not recommended, since this will occupy too much of the CPU time.  
11.8.2  
Clear Timer on Compare Match (CTC) Mode  
In Clear Timer on Compare or CTC mode (WGM03:0 = 4 or 12), the OCR0A or ICR0 Register are used to manipu-  
late the counter resolution. In CTC mode the counter is cleared to zero when the counter value (TCNT0) matches  
either the OCR0A (WGM03:0 = 4) or the ICR0 (WGM03:0 = 12). The OCR0A or ICR0 define the top value for the  
counter, hence also its resolution. This mode allows greater control of the compare match output frequency. It also  
simplifies the operation of counting external events.  
The timing diagram for the CTC mode is shown in Figure 11-8 on page 62. The counter value (TCNT0) increases  
until a compare match occurs with either OCR0A or ICR0, and then counter (TCNT0) is cleared.  
Figure 11-8. CTC Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set  
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set  
(Interrupt on TOP)  
TCNTn  
OCnA  
(Toggle)  
(COMnA1:0 = 1)  
1
2
3
4
Period  
An interrupt can be generated at each time the counter value reaches the TOP value by either using the OCF0A or  
ICF0 flag according to the register used to define the TOP value. If the interrupt is enabled, the interrupt handler  
routine can be used for updating the TOP value. However, changing the TOP to a value close to BOTTOM when  
the counter is running with none or a low prescaler value must be done with care since the CTC mode does not  
have the double buffering feature. If the new value written to OCR0A or ICR0 is lower than the current value of  
TCNT0, the counter will miss the compare match. The counter will then have to count to its maximum value  
(0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can occur. In many cases this feature is  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
62  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
not desirable. An alternative will then be to use the fast PWM mode using OCR0A for defining TOP (WGM03:0 =  
15) since the OCR0A then will be double buffered.  
For generating a waveform output in CTC mode, the OC0A output can be set to toggle its logical level on each  
compare match by setting the Compare Output mode bits to toggle mode (COM0A1:0 = 1). The OC0A value will  
not be visible on the port pin unless the data direction for the pin is set to output (DDR_OC0A = 1). The waveform  
generated will have a maximum frequency of 0A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x0000). The waveform fre-  
quency is defined by the following equation:  
f
clk_I/O  
f
= ---------------------------------------------------  
OCnA  
2 N  1 + OCRnA  
The N variable represents the prescaler factor (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
As for the Normal mode of operation, the TOV0 flag is set in the same timer clock cycle that the counter counts  
from MAX to 0x0000.  
11.8.3  
Fast PWM Mode  
The fast Pulse Width Modulation or fast PWM mode (WGM03:0 = 5, 6, 7, 14, or 15) provides a high frequency  
PWM waveform generation option. The fast PWM differs from the other PWM options by its single-slope operation.  
The counter counts from BOTTOM to TOP then restarts from BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode,  
the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and OCR0x, and set at BOTTOM.  
In inverting Compare Output mode output is set on compare match and cleared at BOTTOM. Due to the single-  
slope operation, the operating frequency of the fast PWM mode can be twice as high as the phase correct and  
phase and frequency correct PWM modes that use dual-slope operation. This high frequency makes the fast PWM  
mode well suited for power regulation, rectification, and DAC applications. High frequency allows physically small  
sized external components (coils, capacitors), hence reduces total system cost.  
The PWM resolution for fast PWM can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICR0 or OCR0A. The mini-  
mum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR0 or OCR0A set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit (ICR0 or  
OCR0A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation:  
logTOP + 1  
R
= ----------------------------------  
FPWM  
log2  
In fast PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed values  
0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM03:0 = 5, 6, or 7), the value in ICR0 (WGM03:0 = 14), or the value in OCR0A  
(WGM03:0 = 15). The counter is then cleared at the following timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the fast  
PWM mode is shown in Figure 11-9 on page 64. The figure shows fast PWM mode when OCR0A or ICR0 is used  
to define TOP. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the single-slope  
operation. The diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the  
TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches between OCR0x and TCNT0. The OC0x interrupt flag will be set when  
a compare match occurs.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
63  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 11-9. Fast PWM Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCRnx/TOP Update and  
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set and  
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set  
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set  
(Interrupt on TOP)  
TCNTn  
(COMnx1:0 = 2)  
(COMnx1:0 = 3)  
OCnx  
OCnx  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Period  
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches TOP. In addition the OC0A or ICF0  
flag is set at the same timer clock cycle as TOV0 is set when either OCR0A or ICR0 is used for defining the TOP  
value. If one of the interrupts are enabled, the interrupt handler routine can be used for updating the TOP and com-  
pare values.  
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of  
all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will  
never occur between the TCNT0 and the OCR0x. Note that when using fixed TOP values the unused bits are  
masked to zero when any of the OCR0x Registers are written.  
The procedure for updating ICR0 differs from updating OCR0A when used for defining the TOP value. The ICR0  
Register is not double buffered. This means that if ICR0 is changed to a low value when the counter is running with  
none or a low prescaler value, there is a risk that the new ICR0 value written is lower than the current value of  
TCNT0. The result will then be that the counter will miss the compare match at the TOP value. The counter will  
then have to count to the MAX value (0xFFFF) and wrap around starting at 0x0000 before the compare match can  
occur. The OCR0A Register however, is double buffered. This feature allows the OCR0A I/O location to be written  
anytime. When the OCR0A I/O location is written the value written will be put into the OCR0A Buffer Register. The  
OCR0A Compare Register will then be updated with the value in the Buffer Register at the next timer clock cycle  
the TCNT0 matches TOP. The update is done at the same timer clock cycle as the TCNT0 is cleared and the  
TOV0 flag is set.  
Using the ICR0 Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICR0, the OCR0A  
Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC0A. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively  
changed (by changing the TOP value), using the OCR0A as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer  
feature.  
In fast PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting the  
COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by setting  
the COM0x1:0 to three (see Table 11-3 on page 73). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on the port pin if  
the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC0x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or  
clearing) the OC0x Register at the compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0, and clearing (or setting) the  
OC0x Register at the timer clock cycle the counter is cleared (changes from TOP to BOTTOM).  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
64  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
The PWM frequency for the output can be calculated by the following equation:  
f
clk_I/O  
f
= -----------------------------------  
OCnxPWM  
N  1 + TOP  
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
The extreme values for the OCR0x Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in  
the fast PWM mode. If the OCR0x is set equal to BOTTOM (0x0000) the output will be a narrow spike for each  
TOP+1 timer clock cycle. Setting the OCR0x equal to TOP will result in a constant high or low output (depending  
on the polarity of the output set by the COM0x1:0 bits.)  
A frequency (with 50% duty cycle) waveform output in fast PWM mode can be achieved by setting OC0A to toggle  
its logical level on each compare match (COM0A1:0 = 1). The waveform generated will have a maximum fre-  
quency of f0A = fclk_I/O/2 when OCR0A is set to zero (0x0000). This feature is similar to the OC0A toggle in CTC  
mode, except the double buffer feature of the Output Compare unit is enabled in the fast PWM mode.  
11.8.4  
Phase Correct PWM Mode  
The phase correct Pulse Width Modulation or phase correct PWM mode (WGM03:0 = 1, 2, 3, 10, or 11) provides a  
high resolution phase correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase correct PWM mode is, like the phase  
and frequency correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The counter counts repeatedly from BOT-  
TOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Compare Output mode, the Output  
Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and OCR0x while upcounting, and set on the  
compare match while downcounting. In inverting Output Compare mode, the operation is inverted. The dual-slope  
operation has lower maximum operation frequency than single slope operation. However, due to the symmetric  
feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are preferred for motor control applications.  
The PWM resolution for the phase correct PWM mode can be fixed to 8-, 9-, or 10-bit, or defined by either ICR0 or  
OCR0A. The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR0 or OCR0A set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is  
16-bit (ICR0 or OCR0A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated by using the following equation:  
logTOP + 1  
R
= ----------------------------------  
PCPWM  
log2  
In phase correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either one of the fixed val-  
ues 0x00FF, 0x01FF, or 0x03FF (WGM03:0 = 1, 2, or 3), the value in ICR0 (WGM03:0 = 10), or the value in  
OCR0A (WGM03:0 = 11). The counter has then reached the TOP and changes the count direction. The TCNT0  
value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram for the phase correct PWM mode is shown  
on Figure 11-10 on page 66. The figure shows phase correct PWM mode when OCR0A or ICR0 is used to define  
TOP. The TCNT0 value is in the timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The  
diagram includes non-inverted and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes  
represent compare matches between OCR0x and TCNT0. The OC0x interrupt flag will be set when a compare  
match occurs.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
65  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 11-10. Phase Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCRnx/TOP Update and  
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set  
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set  
(Interrupt on TOP)  
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set  
(Interrupt on Bottom)  
TCNTn  
(COMnx1:0 = 2)  
(COMnx1:0 = 3)  
OCnx  
OCnx  
1
2
3
4
Period  
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set each time the counter reaches BOTTOM. When either OCR0A or  
ICR0 is used for defining the TOP value, the OC0A or ICF0 flag is set accordingly at the same timer clock cycle as  
the OCR0x Registers are updated with the double buffer value (at TOP). The interrupt flags can be used to gener-  
ate an interrupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.  
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of  
all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will  
never occur between the TCNT0 and the OCR0x. Note that when using fixed TOP values, the unused bits are  
masked to zero when any of the OCR0x Registers are written. As the third period shown in Figure 11-10 on page  
66 illustrates, changing the TOP actively while the Timer/Counter is running in the phase correct mode can result in  
an unsymmetrical output. The reason for this can be found in the time of update of the OCR0x Register. Since the  
OCR0x update occurs at TOP, the PWM period starts and ends at TOP. This implies that the length of the falling  
slope is determined by the previous TOP value, while the length of the rising slope is determined by the new TOP  
value. When these two values differ the two slopes of the period will differ in length. The difference in length gives  
the unsymmetrical result on the output.  
It is recommended to use the phase and frequency correct mode instead of the phase correct mode when chang-  
ing the TOP value while the Timer/Counter is running. When using a static TOP value there are practically no  
differences between the two modes of operation.  
In phase correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x pins. Setting  
the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be generated by set-  
ting the COM0x1:0 to three (See Table 11-4 on page 73). The actual OC0x value will only be visible on the port pin  
if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC0x). The PWM waveform is generated by setting (or  
clearing) the OC0x Register at the compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter increments, and  
clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter decre-  
ments. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase correct PWM can be calculated by the following  
equation:  
f
clk_I/O  
f
= ----------------------------  
OCnxPCPWM  
2 N TOP  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
66  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
The extreme values for the OCR0x Register represent special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in  
the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0x is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set  
equal to TOP the output will be continuously high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will  
have the opposite logic values.  
11.8.5  
Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode  
The phase and frequency correct Pulse Width Modulation, or phase and frequency correct PWM mode (WGM03:0  
= 8 or 9) provides a high resolution phase and frequency correct PWM waveform generation option. The phase  
and frequency correct PWM mode is, like the phase correct PWM mode, based on a dual-slope operation. The  
counter counts repeatedly from BOTTOM (0x0000) to TOP and then from TOP to BOTTOM. In non-inverting Com-  
pare Output mode, the Output Compare (OC0x) is cleared on the compare match between TCNT0 and OCR0x  
while upcounting, and set on the compare match while downcounting. In inverting Compare Output mode, the  
operation is inverted. The dual-slope operation gives a lower maximum operation frequency compared to the sin-  
gle-slope operation. However, due to the symmetric feature of the dual-slope PWM modes, these modes are  
preferred for motor control applications.  
The main difference between the phase correct, and the phase and frequency correct PWM mode is the time the  
OCR0x Register is updated by the OCR0x Buffer Register, (see Figure 11-10 on page 66 and Figure 11-11 on  
page 68).  
The PWM resolution for the phase and frequency correct PWM mode can be defined by either ICR0 or OCR0A.  
The minimum resolution allowed is 2-bit (ICR0 or OCR0A set to 0x0003), and the maximum resolution is 16-bit  
(ICR0 or OCR0A set to MAX). The PWM resolution in bits can be calculated using the following equation:  
logTOP + 1  
R
= ----------------------------------  
PFCPWM  
log2  
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode the counter is incremented until the counter value matches either the  
value in ICR0 (WGM03:0 = 8), or the value in OCR0A (WGM03:0 = 9). The counter has then reached the TOP and  
changes the count direction. The TCNT0 value will be equal to TOP for one timer clock cycle. The timing diagram  
for the phase correct and frequency correct PWM mode is shown on Figure 11-11 on page 68. The figure shows  
phase and frequency correct PWM mode when OCR0A or ICR0 is used to define TOP. The TCNT0 value is in the  
timing diagram shown as a histogram for illustrating the dual-slope operation. The diagram includes non-inverted  
and inverted PWM outputs. The small horizontal line marks on the TCNT0 slopes represent compare matches  
between OCR0x and TCNT0. The OC0x interrupt flag will be set when a compare match occurs.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
67  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 11-11. Phase and Frequency Correct PWM Mode, Timing Diagram  
OCnA Interrupt Flag Set  
or ICFn Interrupt Flag Set  
(Interrupt on TOP)  
OCRnx/TOP Updateand  
TOVn Interrupt Flag Set  
(Interrupt on Bottom)  
TCNTn  
(COMnx1:0 = 2)  
(COMnx1:0 = 3)  
OCnx  
OCnx  
1
2
3
4
Period  
The Timer/Counter Overflow Flag (TOV0) is set at the same timer clock cycle as the OCR0x Registers are updated  
with the double buffer value (at BOTTOM). When either OCR0A or ICR0 is used for defining the TOP value, the  
OC0A or ICF0 flag set when TCNT0 has reached TOP. The interrupt flags can then be used to generate an inter-  
rupt each time the counter reaches the TOP or BOTTOM value.  
When changing the TOP value the program must ensure that the new TOP value is higher or equal to the value of  
all of the Compare Registers. If the TOP value is lower than any of the Compare Registers, a compare match will  
never occur between the TCNT0 and the OCR0x.  
As Figure 11-11 on page 68 shows the output generated is, in contrast to the phase correct mode, symmetrical in  
all periods. Since the OCR0x Registers are updated at BOTTOM, the length of the rising and the falling slopes will  
always be equal. This gives symmetrical output pulses and is therefore frequency correct.  
Using the ICR0 Register for defining TOP works well when using fixed TOP values. By using ICR0, the OCR0A  
Register is free to be used for generating a PWM output on OC0A. However, if the base PWM frequency is actively  
changed by changing the TOP value, using the OCR0A as TOP is clearly a better choice due to its double buffer  
feature.  
In phase and frequency correct PWM mode, the compare units allow generation of PWM waveforms on the OC0x  
pins. Setting the COM0x1:0 bits to two will produce a non-inverted PWM and an inverted PWM output can be gen-  
erated by setting the COM0x1:0 to three (See Table 11-4 on page 73). The actual OC0x value will only be visible  
on the port pin if the data direction for the port pin is set as output (DDR_OC0x). The PWM waveform is generated  
by setting (or clearing) the OC0x Register at the compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the counter  
increments, and clearing (or setting) the OC0x Register at compare match between OCR0x and TCNT0 when the  
counter decrements. The PWM frequency for the output when using phase and frequency correct PWM can be cal-  
culated by the following equation:  
f
clk_I/O  
f
= ----------------------------  
OCnxPFCPWM  
2 N TOP  
The N variable represents the prescaler divider (1, 8, 64, 256, or 1024).  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
68  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
The extreme values for the OCR0x Register represents special cases when generating a PWM waveform output in  
the phase correct PWM mode. If the OCR0x is set equal to BOTTOM the output will be continuously low and if set  
equal to TOP the output will be set to high for non-inverted PWM mode. For inverted PWM the output will have the  
opposite logic values.  
11.9 Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams  
The Timer/Counter is a synchronous design and the timer clock (clkT0) is therefore shown as a clock enable signal  
in the following figures. The figures include information on when interrupt flags are set, and when the OCR0x Reg-  
ister is updated with the OCR0x buffer value (only for modes utilizing double buffering). Figure 11-12 on page 69  
shows a timing diagram for the setting of OCF0x.  
Figure 11-12. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, no Prescaling  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/1)  
TCNTn  
OCRnx  
OCFnx  
OCRnx - 1  
OCRnx  
OCRnx + 1  
OCRnx + 2  
OCRnx Value  
Figure 11-13 on page 69 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.  
Figure 11-13. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, Setting of OCF0x, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/8)  
TCNTn  
OCRnx  
OCFnx  
OCRnx - 1  
OCRnx  
OCRnx + 1  
OCRnx + 2  
OCRnx Value  
Figure 11-14 on page 70 shows the count sequence close to TOP in various modes. When using phase and fre-  
quency correct PWM mode the OCR0x Register is updated at BOTTOM. The timing diagrams will be the same, but  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
69  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
TOP should be replaced by BOTTOM, TOP-1 by BOTTOM+1 and so on. The same renaming applies for modes  
that set the TOV0 flag at BOTTOM.  
Figure 11-14. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, no Prescaling  
clkI/O  
clkTn  
(clkI/O/1)  
TCNTn  
TOP - 1  
TOP - 1  
TOP  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
TOP - 1  
BOTTOM + 1  
TOP - 2  
(CTC and FPWM)  
TCNTn  
(PC and PFC PWM)  
TOVn (FPWM)  
and ICFn (if used  
as TOP)  
OCRnx  
(Update at TOP)  
New OCRnx Value  
Old OCRnx Value  
Figure 11-15 on page 70 shows the same timing data, but with the prescaler enabled.  
Figure 11-15. Timer/Counter Timing Diagram, with Prescaler (fclk_I/O/8)  
clk  
I/O  
clk  
(clkT/n8)  
I/O  
TCNTn  
TOP - 1  
TOP - 1  
TOP  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
TOP - 1  
BOTTOM + 1  
TOP - 2  
(CTC and FPWM)  
TCNTn  
(PC and PFC PWM)  
TOVn(FPWM)  
and ICFn(if used  
as TOP)  
OCRnx  
(Update at TOP)  
Old OCRnx Value  
New OCRnx Value  
11.10 Accessing 16-bit Registers  
The TCNT0, OCR0A/B, and ICR0 are 16-bit registers that can be accessed by the AVR CPU via the 8-bit data bus.  
The 16-bit register must be byte accessed using two read or write operations. Each 16-bit timer has a single 8-bit  
register for temporary storing of the high byte of the 16-bit access. The same temporary register is shared between  
all 16-bit registers within each 16-bit timer. Accessing the low byte triggers the 16-bit read or write operation. When  
the low byte of a 16-bit register is written by the CPU, the high byte stored in the temporary register, and the low  
byte written are both copied into the 16-bit register in the same clock cycle. When the low byte of a 16-bit register is  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
70  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
read by the CPU, the high byte of the 16-bit register is copied into the temporary register in the same clock cycle as  
the low byte is read.  
Not all 16-bit accesses uses the temporary register for the high byte. Reading the OCR0A/B 16-bit registers does  
not involve using the temporary register.  
To do a 16-bit write, the high byte must be written before the low byte. For a 16-bit read, the low byte must be read  
before the high byte.  
The following code example shows how to access the 16-bit timer registers assuming that no interrupts updates  
the temporary register. The same principle can be used directly for accessing the OCR0A/B and ICR0 Registers.  
Assembly Code Example  
...  
; Set TCNT0 to 0x01FF  
ldi r17,0x01  
ldi r16,0xFF  
out TCNT0H,r17  
out TCNT0L,r16  
; Read TCNT0 into r17:r16  
in r16,TCNT0L  
in r17,TCNT0H  
...  
Note:  
See “Code Examples” on page 5.  
The code example returns the TCNT0 value in the r17:r16 register pair.  
It is important to notice that accessing 16-bit registers are atomic operations. If an interrupt occurs between the two  
instructions accessing the 16-bit register, and the interrupt code updates the temporary register by accessing the  
same or any other of the 16-bit timer registers, then the result of the access outside the interrupt will be corrupted.  
Therefore, when both the main code and the interrupt code update the temporary register, the main code must dis-  
able the interrupts during the 16-bit access.  
The following code example shows how to do an atomic read of the TCNT0 Register contents. Reading any of the  
OCR0A/B or ICR0 Registers can be done by using the same principle.  
Assembly Code Example  
TIM16_ReadTCNT0:  
; Save global interrupt flag  
in r18,SREG  
; Disable interrupts  
cli  
; Read TCNT0 into r17:r16  
in r16,TCNT0L  
in r17,TCNT0H  
; Restore global interrupt flag  
out SREG,r18  
ret  
Note:  
See “Code Examples” on page 5.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
71  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
The code example returns the TCNT0 value in the r17:r16 register pair.  
The following code example shows how to do an atomic write of the TCNT0 Register contents. Writing any of the  
OCR0A/B or ICR0 Registers can be done by using the same principle.  
Assembly Code Example  
TIM16_WriteTCNT0:  
; Save global interrupt flag  
in r18,SREG  
; Disable interrupts  
cli  
; Set TCNT0 to r17:r16  
out TCNT0H,r17  
out TCNT0L,r16  
; Restore global interrupt flag  
out SREG,r18  
ret  
Note:  
See “Code Examples” on page 5.  
The code example requires that the r17:r16 register pair contains the value to be written to TCNT0.  
11.10.1 Reusing the Temporary High Byte Register  
If writing to more than one 16-bit register where the high byte is the same for all registers written, then the high byte  
only needs to be written once. However, note that the same rule of atomic operation described previously also  
applies in this case.  
11.11 Register Description  
11.11.1 TCCR0A – Timer/Counter0 Control Register A  
Bit  
7
COM0A1  
R/W  
6
COM0A0  
R/W  
5
COM0B1  
R/W  
4
COM0B0  
R/W  
3
2
1
WGM01  
R/W  
0
0
WGM00  
R/W  
0
0x2E  
TCCR0A  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
0
0
0
0
• Bits 7:6 – COM0A1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel A  
• Bits 5:4 – COM0B1:0: Compare Output Mode for Channel B  
The COM0A1:0 and COM0B1:0 control the behaviour of Output Compare pins OC0A and OC0B, respectively. If  
one or both COM0A1:0 bits are written to one, the OC0A output overrides the normal port functionality of the I/O  
pin it is connected to. Similarly, if one or both COM0B1:0 bit are written to one, the OC0B output overrides the nor-  
mal port functionality of the I/O pin it is connected to.  
Note, however, that the Data Direction Register (DDR) bit corresponding to the OC0A or OC0B pin must be set in  
order to enable the output driver.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
72  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
When OC0A or OC0B is connected to the pin, the function of COM0x1:0 bits depends on the WGM03:0 bits. Table  
11-2 shows the COM0x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM03:0 bits are set to a Normal or CTC (non-PWM) Mode.  
Table 11-2. Compare Output in Non-PWM Modes  
COM0A1/  
COM0B1  
COM0A0  
COM0B0  
Description  
0
1
0
1
Normal port operation: OC0A/OC0B disconnected  
Toggle OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
Clear (set low) OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
Set (high) OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
0
1
Table 11-3 shows the COM0x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM03:0 bits are set to one of the Fast PWM Modes.  
Table 11-3. Compare Output in Fast PWM Modes  
COM0A1/  
COM0B1  
COM0A0/  
COM0B0  
Description  
0
1
Normal port operation: OC0A/OC0B disconnected  
0
WGM03 = 0: Normal port operation, OC0A/OC0B disconnected  
WGM03 = 1: Toggle OC0A on compare match, OC0B reserved  
Clear OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
Set OC0A/OC0B at BOTTOM (non-inverting mode)  
0
1
1 (1)  
Set OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
Clear OC0A/OC0B at BOTTOM (inverting mode)  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A/OCR0B equals TOP and COM0A1/COM0B1 is set. In this case the compare  
match is ignored, but set or clear is done at BOTTOM. See “Fast PWM Mode” on page 63 for more details.  
Table 11-4 shows the COM0x1:0 bit functionality when the WGM03:0 bits are set to the phase correct or the phase  
and frequency correct, PWM mode.  
Table 11-4. Compare Output in Phase Correct and Phase & Frequency Correct PWM Modes  
COM0A1/  
COM0B1  
COM0A0/  
COM0B0  
Description  
0
1
Normal port operation: OC0A/OC0B disconnected.  
0
WGM03 = 0: Normal port operation, OC0A/OC0B disconnected  
WGM03 = 1: Toggle OC0A on compare match, OC0B reserved  
Counting up: Clear OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
Counting down: Set OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
0
1
1 (1)  
Counting up: Set OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
Counting down: Clear OC0A/OC0B on compare match  
Note:  
1. A special case occurs when OCR0A/OCR0B equals TOP and COM0A1/COM0B1 is set. “Phase Correct PWM  
Mode” on page 65 for more details.  
• Bits 1:0 – WGM01:0: Waveform Generation Mode  
Combined with WGM03:2 bits of TCCR0B, these bits control the counting sequence of the counter, the source for  
maximum (TOP) counter value, and what type of waveform to generate. See Table 11-5. Modes of operation sup-  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
73  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
ported by the Timer/Counter unit are: Normal mode (counter), Clear Timer on Compare match (CTC) mode, and  
three types of Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) modes. (“Modes of Operation” on page 61).  
Table 11-5. Waveform Generation Modes  
WGM0  
3:0  
Update of  
OCR0x at  
TOV0 Flag  
Set on  
Mode  
0
Mode of Operation  
Normal  
TOP  
0000  
0001  
0010  
0011  
0100  
0101  
0110  
0111  
1000  
1001  
1010  
1011  
1100  
1101  
1110  
1111  
0xFFFF  
0x00FF  
0x01FF  
0x03FF  
Immediate  
TOP  
MAX  
1
PWM, Phase Correct, 8-bit  
PWM, Phase Correct, 9-bit  
PWM, Phase Correct, 10-bit  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM  
MAX  
2
TOP  
3
TOP  
4
CTC (Clear Timer on Compare) OCR0A  
Immediate  
TOP  
5
Fast PWM, 8-bit  
0x00FF  
0x01FF  
0x03FF  
ICR0  
TOP  
6
Fast PWM, 9-bit  
TOP  
TOP  
7
Fast PWM, 10-bit  
TOP  
TOP  
8
PWM, Phase & Freq. Correct  
PWM, Phase & Freq. Correct  
PWM, Phase Correct  
PWM, Phase Correct  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM  
TOP  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM  
BOTTOM  
MAX  
9
OCR0A  
ICR0  
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
OCR0A  
TOP  
CTC (Clear Timer on Compare) ICR0  
Immediate  
(Reserved)  
Fast PWM  
Fast PWM  
ICR0  
OCR0A  
TOP  
TOP  
TOP  
TOP  
11.11.2 TCCR0B – Timer/Counter0 Control Register B  
Bit  
7
ICNC0  
R/W  
0
6
ICES0  
R/W  
0
5
4
WGM03  
R/W  
0
3
2
CS02  
R/W  
0
1
CS01  
R/W  
0
0
0x2D  
WGM02  
R/W  
0
CS00  
R/W  
0
TCCR0B  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
• Bit 7 – ICNC0: Input Capture Noise Canceler  
Setting this bit (to one) activates the Input Capture Noise Canceler. When the noise canceler is activated, the input  
from the Input Capture pin (ICP0) is filtered. The filter function requires four successive equal valued samples of  
the ICP0 pin for changing its output. The Input Capture is therefore delayed by four oscillator cycles when the noise  
canceler is enabled.  
• Bit 6 – ICES0: Input Capture Edge Select  
This bit selects which edge on the Input Capture pin (ICP0) that is used to trigger a capture event. When the ICES0  
bit is written to zero, a falling (negative) edge is used as trigger, and when the ICES0 bit is written to one, a rising  
(positive) edge will trigger the capture.  
When a capture is triggered according to the ICES0 setting, the counter value is copied into the Input Capture Reg-  
ister (ICR0). The event will also set the Input Capture Flag (ICF0), and this can be used to cause an Input Capture  
Interrupt, if this interrupt is enabled.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
74  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
When the ICR0 is used as TOP value (see description of the WGM03:0 bits located in the TCCR0A and the  
TCCR0B Register), the ICP0 is disconnected and consequently the Input Capture function is disabled.  
• Bit 5 – Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, this bit must be written to zero  
when TCCR0B is written.  
• Bits 4:3 – WGM03:2: Waveform Generation Mode  
See “TCCR0A – Timer/Counter0 Control Register A” on page 72.  
• Bits 2:0 – CS02:0: Clock Select  
The three Clock Select bits set the clock source to be used by the Timer/Counter, see Figure 11-12 and Figure 11-  
13.  
Table 11-6. Clock Select Bit Description  
CS02  
CS01  
CS00  
Description  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
No clock source (Timer/Counter stopped)  
clkI/O/1 (No prescaling)  
clkI/O/8 (From prescaler)  
clkI/O/64 (From prescaler)  
clkI/O/256 (From prescaler)  
clkI/O/1024 (From prescaler)  
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on falling edge  
External clock source on T0 pin. Clock on rising edge  
If external pin modes are used for the Timer/Counter0, transitions on the T0 pin will clock the counter even if the  
pin is configured as an output. This feature allows software control of the counting.  
11.11.3 TCCR0C – Timer/Counter0 Control Register C  
Bit  
7
FOC0A  
W
6
FOC0B  
W
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x2C  
TCCR0C  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
0
• Bit 7 – FOC0A: Force Output Compare for Channel A  
• Bit 6 – FOC0B: Force Output Compare for Channel B  
The FOC0A/FOC0B bits are only active when the WGM03:0 bits specifies a non-PWM mode. However, for ensur-  
ing compatibility with future devices, these bits must be set to zero when TCCR0A is written when operating in a  
PWM mode. When writing a logical one to the FOC0A/FOC0B bit, an immediate compare match is forced on the  
Waveform Generation unit. The OC0A/OC0B output is changed according to its COM0x1:0 bits setting. Note that  
the FOC0A/FOC0B bits are implemented as strobes. Therefore it is the value present in the COM0x1:0 bits that  
determine the effect of the forced compare.  
A FOC0A/FOC0B strobe will not generate any interrupt nor will it clear the timer in Clear Timer on Compare match  
(CTC) mode using OCR0A as TOP.  
The FOC0A/FOC0B bits are always read as zero.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
75  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• Bits 5:0 – Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to  
zero when the register is written.  
11.11.4 TCNT0H and TCNT0L – Timer/Counter0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x29  
TCNT0[15:8]  
TCNT0[7:0]  
TCNT0H  
TCNT0L  
0x28  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
The two Timer/Counter I/O locations (TCNT0H and TCNT0L, combined TCNT0) give direct access, both for read  
and for write operations, to the Timer/Counter unit 16-bit counter. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are  
read and written simultaneously when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit  
temporary high byte register (TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See  
“Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page 70.  
Modifying the counter (TCNT0) while the counter is running introduces a risk of missing a compare match between  
TCNT0 and one of the OCR0x Registers.  
Writing to the TCNT0 Register blocks (removes) the compare match on the following timer clock for all compare  
units.  
11.11.5 OCR0AH and OCR0AL – Output Compare Register 0 A  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x27  
OCR1A[15:8]  
OCR1A[7:0]  
OCR0AH  
OCR0AL  
0x26  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
0
11.11.6 OCR0BH and OCR0BL – Output Compare Register 0 B  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x25  
OCR0B[15:8]  
OCR0B[7:0]  
OCR0BH  
OCR0BL  
0x24  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
0
0
The Output Compare Registers contain a 16-bit value that is continuously compared with the counter value  
(TCNT0). A match can be used to generate an Output Compare interrupt, or to generate a waveform output on the  
OC0x pin.  
The Output Compare Registers are 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are written simultane-  
ously when the CPU writes to these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary high byte register  
(TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. See “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on  
page 70.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
76  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
11.11.7 ICR0H and ICR0L – Input Capture Register 0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x23  
ICR0[15:8]  
ICR0[7:0]  
ICR0H  
ICR0L  
0x22  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
The Input Capture is updated with the counter (TCNT0) value each time an event occurs on the ICP0 pin (or  
optionally on the Analog Comparator output for Timer/Counter0). The Input Capture can be used for defining the  
counter TOP value.  
The Input Capture Register is 16-bit in size. To ensure that both the high and low bytes are read simultaneously  
when the CPU accesses these registers, the access is performed using an 8-bit temporary high byte register  
(TEMP). This temporary register is shared by all the other 16-bit registers. “Accessing 16-bit Registers” on page  
70.  
11.11.8 TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register 0  
Bit  
7
6
5
ICIE0  
R/W  
0
4
3
2
OCIE0B  
R/W  
0
1
OCIE0A  
R/W  
0
0
TOIE0  
R/W  
0
0x2B  
TIMSK0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:6, 4:3 – Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to  
zero when the register is written.  
• Bit 5 – ICIE0: Timer/Counter0, Input Capture Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the  
Timer/Counter0 Input Capture interrupt is enabled. The  
corresponding Interrupt Vector (See “Interrupts” on page 66.) is executed when the  
ICF0 Flag, located in TIFR0, is set.  
• Bit 2 – OCIE0B: Timer/Counter0, Output Compare B Match Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the  
Timer/Counter0 Output Compare B Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (see “Inter-  
rupts” on page 35) is executed when the OCF0B flag, located in TIFR0, is set.  
• Bit 1 – OCIE0A: Timer/Counter0, Output Compare A Match Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the  
Timer/Counter0 Output Compare A Match interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (see “Inter-  
rupts” on page 35) is executed when the OCF0A flag, located in TIFR0, is set.  
• Bit 0 – TOIE0: Timer/Counter0, Overflow Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one, and the I-flag in the Status Register is set (interrupts globally enabled), the  
Timer/Counter0 Overflow interrupt is enabled. The corresponding Interrupt Vector (see “Interrupts” on page 35) is  
executed when the TOV0 flag, located in TIFR0, is set.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
77  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
11.11.9 TIFR0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Flag Register 0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
OCF0B  
R/W  
0
1
OCF0A  
R/W  
0
0
TOV0  
R/W  
0
0x2A  
ICF0  
R/W  
0
TIFR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:6, 4:3 – Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved for future use. For ensuring compatibility with future devices, these bits must be written to  
zero when the register is written.  
• Bit 5 – ICF0: Timer/Counter0, Input Capture Flag  
This flag is set when a capture event occurs on the ICP0 pin. When the Input Capture Register (ICR0) is set by the  
WGM03:0 to be used as the TOP value, the ICF0 flag is set when the counter reaches the TOP value.  
ICF0 is automatically cleared when the Input Capture Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, ICF0 can be  
cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.  
• Bit 2 – OCF1B: Timer/Counter0, Output Compare B Match Flag  
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT0) value matches the Output Compare Register B  
(OCR0B).  
Note that a Forced Output Compare (0B) strobe will not set the OCF0B flag.  
OCF1B is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match B Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively,  
OCF1B can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.  
• Bit 1 – OCF0A: Timer/Counter0, Output Compare A Match Flag  
This flag is set in the timer clock cycle after the counter (TCNT0) value matches the Output Compare Register A  
(OCR0A).  
Note that a Forced Output Compare (1A) strobe will not set the OCF0A flag.  
OCF0A is automatically cleared when the Output Compare Match A Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively,  
OCF0A can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.  
• Bit 0 – TOV0: Timer/Counter0, Overflow Flag  
The setting of this flag is dependent of the WGM03:0 bits setting. In Normal and CTC modes, the TOV0 flag is set  
when the timer overflows. See Table 11-5 on page 74 for the TOV0 flag behavior when using another WGM03:0 bit  
setting.  
TOV0 is automatically cleared when the Timer/Counter0 Overflow Interrupt Vector is executed. Alternatively, TOV0  
can be cleared by writing a logic one to its bit location.  
11.11.10 GTCCR – General Timer/Counter Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x2F  
TSM  
R/W  
0
PSR  
R/W  
0
GTCCR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bit 7 – TSM: Timer/Counter Synchronization Mode  
Writing the TSM bit to one activates the Timer/Counter Synchronization mode. In this mode, the value that is writ-  
ten to the PSR bit is kept, hence keeping the Prescaler Reset signal asserted. This ensures that the Timer/Counter  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
78  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
is halted and can be configured without the risk of advancing during configuration. When the TSM bit is written to  
zero, the PSR bit is cleared by hardware, and the Timer/Counter start counting.  
• Bit 0 – PSR: Prescaler 0 Reset Timer/Counter 0  
When this bit is one, the Timer/Counter0 prescaler will be Reset. This bit is normally cleared immediately by hard-  
ware, except if the TSM bit is set.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
79  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
12. Analog Comparator  
The Analog Comparator compares the input values on the positive pin AIN0 and negative pin AIN1. When the volt-  
age on the positive pin AIN0 is higher than the voltage on the negative pin AIN1, the Analog Comparator output,  
ACO, is set. The comparator can trigger a separate interrupt, exclusive to the Analog Comparator. The user can  
select Interrupt triggering on comparator output rise, fall or toggle. A block diagram of the comparator and its sur-  
rounding logic is shown in Figure 12-1.  
Figure 12-1. Analog Comparator Block Diagram.  
See Figure 1-1 on page 2 for pin use of analog comparator, and Table 10-4 on page 49 and Table 10-5 on page 50  
for alternate pin usage.  
12.1 Register Description  
12.1.1  
ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
ACO  
R
4
ACI  
R/W  
0
3
ACIE  
R/W  
0
2
ACIC  
R/W  
0
1
ACIS1  
R/W  
0
0
ACIS0  
R/W  
0
0x1F  
ACD  
R/W  
0
ACSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
0
• Bit 7 – ACD: Analog Comparator Disable  
When this bit is written logic one, the power to the analog comparator is switched off. This bit can be set at any time  
to turn off the analog comparator, thus reducing power consumption in Active and Idle mode. When changing the  
ACD bit, the analog comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing the ACIE bit in ACSR. Otherwise an inter-  
rupt can occur when the bit is changed.  
• Bits 6 – Res: Reserved Bit  
This bit is reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 5 – ACO: Analog Comparator Output  
Enables output of analog comparator. The output of the analog comparator is synchronized and then directly con-  
nected to ACO. The synchronization introduces a delay of 1 - 2 clock cycles.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
80  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• Bit 4 – ACI: Analog Comparator Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set by hardware when a comparator output event triggers the interrupt mode defined by ACIS1 and  
ACIS0. The analog comparator interrupt routine is executed if the ACIE bit is set and the I-bit in SREG is set. ACI  
is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ACI is cleared by  
writing a logic one to the flag.  
• Bit 3 – ACIE: Analog Comparator Interrupt Enable  
When the ACIE bit is written logic one, the Analog Comparator interrupt request is enabled. When written logic  
zero, the interrupt request is disabled.  
• Bit 2 – ACIC: Analog Comparator Input Capture Enable  
When set, this bit enables the input capture function in Timer/Counter0 to be triggered by the analog comparator.  
In this case, the comparator output is directly connected to the input capture front-end logic, using the noise can-  
celer and edge select features of the Timer/Counter0 input capture interrupt. To make the comparator trigger the  
Timer/Counter0 input capture interrupt, the ICIE0 bit in “TIMSK0 – Timer/Counter Interrupt Mask Register 0” must  
be set.  
When this bit is cleared, no connection between the analog comparator and the input capture function exists.  
• Bits 1:0 – ACIS1, ACIS0: Analog Comparator Interrupt Mode Select  
These bits determine which comparator events that trigger the analog comparator interrupt. The different settings  
are shown in Table 12-1.  
Table 12-1. Selecting Source for Analog Comparator Interrupt.  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
Interrupt Mode  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Comparator Interrupt on Output Toggle.  
Reserved  
Comparator Interrupt on Falling Output Edge.  
Comparator Interrupt on Rising Output Edge.  
When changing the ACIS1/ACIS0 bits, the analog comparator Interrupt must be disabled by clearing its Interrupt  
Enable bit in “ACSR – Analog Comparator Control and Status Register”. Otherwise an interrupt can occur when  
the bits are changed.  
12.1.2  
DIDR0 – Digital Input Disable Register 0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
ADC3D  
R/W  
0
2
ADC2D  
R/W  
0
1
ADC1D  
R/W  
0
0
ADC0D  
R/W  
0
0x17  
DIDR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 1:0 – ADC1D, ADC0D: Digital Input Disable  
When this bit is set, the digital input buffer on pin AIN1 (ADC1) / AIN0 (ADC0) is disabled and the corresponding  
PIN register bit will read as zero. When used as an analog input but not required as a digital input the power con-  
sumption in the digital input buffer can be reduced by writing this bit to logic one.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
81  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
13. Analog to Digital Converter  
13.1 Features  
8-bit Resolution  
0.5 LSB Integral Non-linearity  
± 1 LSB Absolute Accuracy  
65µs Conversion Time  
15 kSPS at Full Resolution  
Four Multiplexed Single Ended Input Channels  
Input Voltage Range: 0 – VCC  
Supply Voltage Range: 2.5V – 5.5V  
Free Running or Single Conversion Mode  
ADC Start Conversion by Auto Triggering on Interrupt Sources  
Interrupt on ADC Conversion Complete  
Sleep Mode Noise Canceler  
13.2 Overview  
ATtiny5/10 feature an 8-bit, successive approximation ADC. The ADC is connected to a 4-channel analog multi-  
plexer which allows four single-ended voltage inputs constructed from the pins of port B. The single-ended voltage  
inputs refer to 0V (GND).  
The ADC contains a Sample-and-Hold-circuit, which ensures that the input voltage to the ADC is held at a constant  
level during conversion. A block diagram of the ADC is shown in Figure 13-1 on page 83.  
Internal reference voltage of VCC is provided on-chip.  
The ADC is not available in ATtiny4/9.  
13.3 Operation  
In order to be able to use the ADC the Power Reduction bit, PRADC, in the Power Reduction Register must be dis-  
abled. This is done by clearing the PRADC bit. See “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 26 for more  
details.  
The ADC is enabled by setting the ADC Enable bit, ADEN in “ADCSRA – ADC Control and Status Register A”.  
Input channel selections will not go into effect until ADEN is set. The ADC does not consume power when ADEN is  
cleared, so it is recommended to switch off the ADC before entering power saving sleep modes.  
The ADC converts an analog input voltage to an 8-bit digital value using successive approximation. The minimum  
value represents GND and the maximum value represents the voltage on VCC  
.
The analog input channel is selected by writing MUX1:0 bits. See “ADMUX – ADC Multiplexer Selection Register”  
on page 92. Any of the ADC input pins can be selected as single ended inputs to the ADC.  
The ADC generates an 8-bit result which is presented in the ADC data register. See “ADCL – ADC Data Register”  
on page 94.  
The ADC has its own interrupt request which can be triggered when a conversion completes.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
82  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 13-1. Analog to Digital Converter Block Schematic  
8-BIT DATA BUS  
ADCSRB  
ADCL  
ADMUX  
ADCSRA  
ADC IRQ  
TRIGGER  
SELECT  
DECODER  
PRESCALER  
CONVERSION LOGIC  
VREF  
V
8-BIT DAC  
CC  
-
ADC3  
ADC2  
ADC1  
ADC0  
+
SAMPLE & HOLD  
COMPARATOR  
INPUT  
MUX  
13.4 Starting a Conversion  
Make sure the ADC is powered by clearing the ADC Power Reduction bit, PRADC, in the Power Reduction Regis-  
ter, PRR (see “PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 26).  
A single conversion is started by writing a logical one to the ADC Start Conversion bit, ADSC. This bit stays high as  
long as the conversion is in progress and will be cleared by hardware when the conversion is completed. If a differ-  
ent data channel is selected while a conversion is in progress, the ADC will finish the current conversion before  
performing the channel change.  
Alternatively, a conversion can be triggered automatically by various sources. Auto Triggering is enabled by setting  
the ADC Auto Trigger Enable bit, ADATE in ADCSRA. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC Trigger  
Select bits, ADTS in “ADCSRB – ADC Control and Status Register B”. See Table 13-4 on page 93 for a list of the  
trigger sources. When a positive edge occurs on the selected trigger signal, the ADC prescaler is reset and a con-  
version is started. This provides a method of starting conversions at fixed intervals. If the trigger signal still is set  
when the conversion completes, a new conversion will not be started. If another positive edge occurs on the trigger  
signal during conversion, the edge will be ignored. Note that an interrupt flag will be set even if the specific interrupt  
is disabled. A conversion can thus be triggered without causing an interrupt. However, the interrupt flag must be  
cleared in order to trigger a new conversion at the next interrupt event.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
83  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 13-2. ADC Auto Trigger Logic  
ADTS[2:0]  
PRESCALER  
CLKADC  
START  
ADIF  
ADATE  
SOURCE 1  
.
.
.
.
CONVERSION  
LOGIC  
EDGE  
DETECTOR  
SOURCE n  
ADSC  
Using the ADC interrupt flag as a trigger source makes the ADC start a new conversion as soon as the ongoing  
conversion has finished. The ADC then operates in Free Running mode, constantly sampling and updating the  
ADC data register. The first conversion must be started by writing a logical one to bit ADSC bit in ADCSRA. In this  
mode the ADC will perform successive conversions independently of whether the ADC Interrupt Flag, ADIF is  
cleared or not.  
If Auto Triggering is enabled, single conversions can be started by writing ADSC in ADCSRA to one. ADSC can  
also be used to determine if a conversion is in progress. The ADSC bit will be read as one during a conversion,  
independently of how the conversion was started.  
13.5 Prescaling and Conversion Timing  
By default, the successive approximation circuitry requires an input clock frequency between 50 kHz and 200 kHz  
to get maximum resolution.  
Figure 13-3. ADC Prescaler  
ADEN  
START  
Reset  
7-BIT ADC PRESCALER  
CK  
ADPS0  
ADPS1  
ADPS2  
ADC CLOCK SOURCE  
The ADC module contains a prescaler, as illustrated in Figure 13-3 on page 84, which generates an acceptable  
ADC clock frequency from any CPU frequency above 100 kHz. The prescaling is set by the ADPS bits in ADCSRA.  
The prescaler starts counting from the moment the ADC is switched on by setting the ADEN bit in ADCSRA. The  
prescaler keeps running for as long as the ADEN bit is set, and is continuously reset when ADEN is low.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
84  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
When initiating a single ended conversion by setting the ADSC bit in ADCSRA, the conversion starts at the follow-  
ing rising edge of the ADC clock cycle.  
A normal conversion takes 13 ADC clock cycles, as summarised in Table 13-1 on page 86. The first conversion  
after the ADC is switched on (ADEN in ADCSRA is set) takes 25 ADC clock cycles in order to initialize the analog  
circuitry. See Figure 13-4.  
Figure 13-4. ADC Timing Diagram, First Conversion (Single Conversion Mode)  
Next  
First Conversion  
Conversion  
Cycle Number  
1
2
12  
13  
14  
15  
16  
17  
18  
19  
20  
21  
22  
23  
24  
25  
1
2
3
ADC Clock  
ADEN  
ADSC  
ADIF  
Conversion Result  
ADCL  
MUX  
Update  
Sample & Hold  
Conversion MUX  
Complete Update  
The actual sample-and-hold takes place 3 ADC clock cycles after the start of a normal conversion and 16 ADC  
clock cycles after the start of a first conversion. See Figure 13-5. When a conversion is complete, the result is writ-  
ten to the ADC Data Registers, and ADIF is set. In Single Conversion mode, ADSC is cleared simultaneously. The  
software may then set ADSC again, and a new conversion will be initiated on the first rising ADC clock edge.  
Figure 13-5. ADC Timing Diagram, Single Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
ADIF  
ADCL  
Conversion Result  
Sample & Hold  
Conversion  
Complete  
MUX  
Update  
MUX  
Update  
When Auto Triggering is used, the prescaler is reset when the trigger event occurs. See Figure 13-6. This assures  
a fixed delay from the trigger event to the start of conversion. In this mode, the sample-and-hold takes place two  
ADC clock cycles after the rising edge on the trigger source signal. Three additional CPU clock cycles are used for  
synchronization logic.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
85  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 13-6. ADC Timing Diagram, Auto Triggered Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
Trigger  
Source  
ADATE  
ADIF  
ADCL  
Conversion Result  
Prescaler  
Reset  
Prescaler MUX  
Reset Update  
Sample &  
Hold  
Conversion  
Complete  
In Free Running mode (see Figure 13-7), a new conversion will be started immediately after the conversion com-  
pletes, while ADSC remains high.  
Figure 13-7. ADC Timing Diagram, Free Running Conversion  
One Conversion  
Next Conversion  
11  
12  
13  
1
2
3
4
Cycle Number  
ADC Clock  
ADSC  
ADIF  
ADCL  
Conversion Result  
Conversion complete  
MUX update  
Sample & Hold  
For a summary of conversion times, see Table 13-1.  
Table 13-1. ADC Conversion Time  
Sample & Hold (Cycles  
Condition  
from Start of Conversion)  
Conversion Time (Cycles)  
First conversion  
16.5  
3.5  
4
25  
13  
Normal conversions  
Auto Triggered conversions  
13.5  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
86  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
13.6 Changing Channel  
The MUXn bits in the ADMUX Register are single buffered through a temporary register to which the CPU has ran-  
dom access. This ensures that the channel selection only takes place at a safe point during the conversion. The  
channel is continuously updated until a conversion is started. Once the conversion starts, the channel selection is  
locked to ensure a sufficient sampling time for the ADC. Continuous updating resumes in the last ADC clock cycle  
before the conversion completes (ADIF in ADCSRA is set). Note that the conversion starts on the following rising  
ADC clock edge after ADSC is written. The user is thus advised not to write new channel selection values to  
ADMUX until one ADC clock cycle after ADSC is written.  
If Auto Triggering is used, the exact time of the triggering event can be indeterministic. Special care must be taken  
when updating the ADMUX Register, in order to control which conversion will be affected by the new settings.  
If both ADATE and ADEN is written to one, an interrupt event can occur at any time. If the ADMUX Register is  
changed in this period, the user cannot tell if the next conversion is based on the old or the new settings. ADMUX  
can be safely updated in the following ways:  
• When ADATE or ADEN is cleared.  
• During conversion, minimum one ADC clock cycle after the trigger event.  
• After a conversion, before the Interrupt Flag used as trigger source is cleared.  
When updating ADMUX in one of these conditions, the new settings will affect the next ADC conversion.  
13.6.1  
ADC Input Channels  
When changing channel selections, the user should observe the following guidelines to ensure that the correct  
channel is selected:  
• In Single Conversion mode, always select the channel before starting the conversion. The channel selection  
may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for  
the conversion to complete before changing the channel selection.  
• In Free Running mode, always select the channel before starting the first conversion. The channel selection  
may be changed one ADC clock cycle after writing one to ADSC. However, the simplest method is to wait for  
the first conversion to complete, and then change the channel selection. Since the next conversion has already  
started automatically, the next result will reflect the previous channel selection. Subsequent conversions will  
reflect the new channel selection.  
13.6.2  
ADC Voltage Reference  
The reference voltage of the ADC determines the conversion range, which in this case is limited to 0V (VGND) and  
VREF = Vcc. Channels that exceed VREF will result in codes saturated at 0xFF.  
13.7 ADC Noise Canceler  
The ADC features a noise canceler that enables conversion during sleep mode to reduce noise induced from the  
CPU core and other I/O peripherals. The noise canceler can be used with ADC Noise Reduction and Idle mode. To  
make use of this feature, the following procedure should be used:  
• Make sure that the ADC is enabled and is not busy converting. Single Conversion mode must be selected and  
the ADC conversion complete interrupt must be enabled.  
• Enter ADC Noise Reduction mode (or Idle mode). The ADC will start a conversion once the CPU has been  
halted.  
• If no other interrupts occur before the ADC conversion completes, the ADC interrupt will wake up the CPU and  
execute the ADC Conversion Complete interrupt routine. If another interrupt wakes up the CPU before the ADC  
conversion is complete, that interrupt will be executed, and an ADC Conversion Complete interrupt request will  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
87  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
be generated when the ADC conversion completes. The CPU will remain in active mode until a new sleep  
command is executed.  
Note that the ADC will not be automatically turned off when entering other sleep modes than Idle mode and ADC  
Noise Reduction mode. The user is advised to write zero to ADEN before entering such sleep modes to avoid  
excessive power consumption.  
13.8 Analog Input Circuitry  
The analog input circuitry for single ended channels is illustrated in Figure 13-8 An analog source applied to ADCn  
is subjected to the pin capacitance and input leakage of that pin, regardless of whether that channel is selected as  
input for the ADC. When the channel is selected, the source must drive the S/H (sample and hold) capacitor  
through the series resistance (combined resistance in the input path).  
Figure 13-8. Analog Input Circuitry  
IIH  
ADCn  
1..100 kohm  
CS/H= 14 pF  
IIL  
VCC/2  
The capacitor in Figure 13-8 depicts the total capacitance, including the sample/hold capacitor and any stray or  
parasitic capacitance inside the device. The value given is worst case.  
The ADC is optimized for analog signals with an output impedance of approximately 10 k, or less. With such  
sources, the sampling time will be negligible. If a source with higher impedance is used, the sampling time will  
depend on how long time the source needs to charge the S/H capacitor. This can vary widely. The user is recom-  
mended to only use low impedance sources with slowly varying signals, since this minimizes the required charge  
transfer to the S/H capacitor.  
Signal components higher than the Nyquist frequency (fADC/2) should not be present to avoid distortion from unpre-  
dictable signal convolution. The user is advised to remove high frequency components with a low-pass filter before  
applying the signals as inputs to the ADC.  
13.9 Noise Canceling Techniques  
Digital circuitry inside and outside the device generates EMI which might affect the accuracy of analog measure-  
ments. When conversion accuracy is critical, the noise level can be reduced by applying the following techniques:  
• Keep analog signal paths as short as possible.  
• Make sure analog tracks run over the analog ground plane.  
• Keep analog tracks well away from high-speed switching digital tracks.  
• If any port pin is used as a digital output, it mustn’t switch while a conversion is in progress.  
• Place bypass capacitors as close to VCC and GND pins as possible.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
88  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Where high ADC accuracy is required it is recommended to use ADC Noise Reduction Mode, as described in Sec-  
tion 13.7 on page 87. A good system design with properly placed, external bypass capacitors does reduce the  
need for using ADC Noise Reduction Mode  
13.10 ADC Accuracy Definitions  
An n-bit single-ended ADC converts a voltage linearly between GND and VREF in 2n steps (LSBs). The lowest code  
is read as 0, and the highest code is read as 2n-1.  
Several parameters describe the deviation from the ideal behavior:  
• Offset: The deviation of the first transition (0x00 to 0x01) compared to the ideal transition (at 0.5 LSB). Ideal  
value: 0 LSB.  
Figure 13-9. Offset Error  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
Offset  
Error  
VREF  
Input Voltage  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
89  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• Gain Error: After adjusting for offset, the Gain Error is found as the deviation of the last transition (0xFE to 0xFF)  
compared to the ideal transition (at 1.5 LSB below maximum). Ideal value: 0 LSB  
Figure 13-10. Gain Error  
Gain  
Error  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
VREF  
Input Voltage  
• Integral Non-linearity (INL): After adjusting for offset and gain error, the INL is the maximum deviation of an  
actual transition compared to an ideal transition for any code. Ideal value: 0 LSB.  
Figure 13-11. Integral Non-linearity (INL)  
Output Code  
Ideal ADC  
Actual ADC  
VREF Input Voltage  
• Differential Non-linearity (DNL): The maximum deviation of the actual code width (the interval between two  
adjacent transitions) from the ideal code width (1 LSB). Ideal value: 0 LSB.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
90  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 13-12. Differential Non-linearity (DNL)  
Output Code  
0xFF  
1 LSB  
DNL  
0x00  
0
VREF Input Voltage  
• Quantization Error: Due to the quantization of the input voltage into a finite number of codes, a range of input  
voltages (1 LSB wide) will code to the same value. Always ± 0.5 LSB.  
• Absolute Accuracy: The maximum deviation of an actual (unadjusted) transition compared to an ideal transition  
for any code. This is the compound effect of offset, gain error, differential error, non-linearity, and quantization  
error. Ideal value: ± 0.5 LSB.  
13.11 ADC Conversion Result  
After the conversion is complete (ADIF is high), the conversion result can be found in the ADC Data Register  
(ADCL). For single ended conversion, the result is  
V
256  
IN  
ADCL = ----------------------  
V
CC  
where VIN (see Table 13-2 on page 92) is the voltage on the selected input pin and VCC is the voltage reference.  
0x00 represents analog ground, and 0xFF represents the selected reference voltage minus one LSB.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
91  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
13.12 Register Description  
13.12.1 ADMUX ADC Multiplexer Selection Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
MUX1  
R/W  
0
0
MUX0  
R/W  
0
0x1B  
ADMUX  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:2 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bits 1:0 – MUX1:0: Analog Channel Selection Bits  
The value of these bits selects which combination of analog inputs are connected to the ADC. See Table 13-2 for  
details..  
Table 13-2. Input Channel Selections  
MUX1  
MUX0  
Single Ended Input  
ADC0  
Pin  
0
1
0
1
PB0  
PB1  
PB2  
PB3  
0
ADC1  
ADC2  
1
ADC3  
If these bits are changed during a conversion, the change will not go in effect until the conversion is complete  
(ADIF in ADCSRA is set)  
13.12.2 ADCSRA ADC Control and Status Register A  
Bit  
7
ADEN  
R/W  
0
6
ADSC  
R/W  
0
5
ADATE  
R/W  
0
4
ADIF  
R/W  
0
3
ADIE  
R/W  
0
2
ADPS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADPS1  
R/W  
0
0
ADPS0  
R/W  
0
0x1D  
ADCSRA  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
• Bit 7 – ADEN: ADC Enable  
Writing this bit to one enables the ADC. By writing it to zero, the ADC is turned off. Turning the ADC off while a con-  
version is in progress, will terminate this conversion.  
• Bit 6 – ADSC: ADC Start Conversion  
In Single Conversion mode, write this bit to one to start each conversion. In Free Running mode, write this bit to  
one to start the first conversion. The first conversion after ADSC has been written after the ADC has been enabled,  
or if ADSC is written at the same time as the ADC is enabled, will take 25 ADC clock cycles instead of the normal  
13. This first conversion performs initialization of the ADC.  
ADSC will read as one as long as a conversion is in progress. When the conversion is complete, it returns to zero.  
Writing zero to this bit has no effect.  
• Bit 5 – ADATE: ADC Auto Trigger Enable  
When this bit is written to one, Auto Triggering of the ADC is enabled. The ADC will start a conversion on a positive  
edge of the selected trigger signal. The trigger source is selected by setting the ADC Trigger Select bits, ADTS in  
ADCSRB.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
92  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• Bit 4 – ADIF: ADC Interrupt Flag  
This bit is set when an ADC conversion completes and the data registers are updated. The ADC Conversion Com-  
plete Interrupt is requested if the ADIE bit is set. ADIF is cleared by hardware when executing the corresponding  
interrupt handling vector. Alternatively, ADIF is cleared by writing a logical one to the flag.  
• Bit 3 – ADIE: ADC Interrupt Enable  
When this bit is written to one, the ADC Conversion Complete Interrupt request is enabled.  
• Bits 2:0 – ADPS2:0: ADC Prescaler Select Bits  
These bits determine the division factor between the system clock frequency and the input clock to the ADC.  
Table 13-3. ADC Prescaler Selections  
ADPS2  
ADPS1  
ADPS0  
Division Factor  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
2
4
8
16  
32  
64  
128  
13.12.3 ADCSRB ADC Control and Status Register B  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
ADTS2  
R/W  
0
1
ADTS1  
R/W  
0
0
0x1C  
ADTS0  
R/W  
0
ADCSRB  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bits 2:0 – ADTS2:0: ADC Auto Trigger Source  
If ADATE in ADCSRA is written to one, the value of these bits selects which source will trigger an ADC conversion.  
If ADATE is cleared, the ADTS2:0 settings will have no effect. A conversion will be triggered by the rising edge of  
the selected Interrupt Flag. Note that switching from a trigger source that is cleared to a trigger source that is set,  
will generate a positive edge on the trigger signal. If ADEN in ADCSRA is set, this will start a conversion. Switching  
to Free Running mode (ADTS[2:0]=0) will not cause a trigger event, even if the ADC Interrupt Flag is set.  
Table 13-4. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections  
ADTS2  
ADTS1  
ADTS0  
Trigger Source  
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Free Running mode  
Analog Comparator  
External Interrupt Flag 0  
Timer/Counter 0 Compare Match A  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
93  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 13-4. ADC Auto Trigger Source Selections  
ADTS2  
ADTS1  
ADTS0  
Trigger Source  
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Timer/Counter 0 Overflow  
Timer/Counter 0 Compare Match B  
Pin Change Interrupt 0 Request  
Timer/Counter 0 Capture Event  
13.12.4 ADCL ADC Data Register  
Bit  
7
ADC7  
R
6
ADC6  
R
5
ADC5  
R
4
ADC4  
R
3
2
ADC2  
R
1
ADC1  
R
0
ADC0  
R
0x19  
ADC3  
ADCL  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
When an ADC conversion is complete, the result is found in the ADC register.  
• Bits 7:0 – ADC7:0: ADC Conversion Result  
These bits represent the result from the conversion.  
13.12.5 DIDR0 Digital Input Disable Register 0  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
ADC3D  
R/W  
0
2
ADC2D  
R/W  
0
1
ADC1D  
R/W  
0
0
ADC0D  
R/W  
0
0x17  
DIDR0  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:4 – Res: Reserved Bit  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bits 3:0 – ADC3D..ADC0D: ADC3..0 Digital Input Disable  
When this bit is written logic one, the digital input buffer on the corresponding ADC pin is disabled. The corre-  
sponding PIN register bit will always read as zero when this bit is set. When an analog signal is applied to the  
ADC3..0 pin and the digital input from this pin is not needed, this bit should be written logic one to reduce power  
consumption in the digital input buffer.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
94  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
14. Programming interface  
14.1 Features  
Physical Layer:  
– Synchronous Data Transfer  
– Bi-directional, Half-duplex Receiver And Transmitter  
– Fixed Frame Format With One Start Bit, 8 Data Bits, One Parity Bit And 2 Stop Bits  
– Parity Error Detection, Frame Error Detection And Break Character Detection  
– Parity Generation And Collision Detection  
– Automatic Guard Time Insertion Between Data Reception And Transmission  
Access Layer:  
– Communication Based On Messages  
– Automatic Exception Handling Mechanism  
– Compact Instruction Set  
– NVM Programming Access Control  
– Tiny Programming Interface Control And Status Space Access Control  
– Data Space Access Control  
14.2 Overview  
The Tiny Programming Interface (TPI) supports external programming of all Non-Volatile Memories (NVM). Mem-  
ory programming is done via the NVM Controller, by executing NVM controller commands as described in “Memory  
Programming” on page 106.  
The Tiny Programming Interface (TPI) provides access to the programming facilities. The interface consists of two  
layers: the access layer and the physical layer. The layers are illustrated in Figure 14-1.  
Figure 14-1. The Tiny Programming Interface and Related Internal Interfaces  
NVM  
CONTROLLER  
TINY PROGRAMMING INTERFACE (TPI)  
RESET  
TPICLK  
PHYSICAL  
LAYER  
ACCESS  
LAYER  
NON-VOLATILE  
MEMORIES  
TPIDATA  
DATA BUS  
Programming is done via the physical interface. This is a 3-pin interface, which uses the RESET pin as enable, the  
TPICLK pin as the clock input, and the TPIDATA pin as data input and output.  
NVM can be programmed at 5V, only.  
14.3 Physical Layer of Tiny Programming Interface  
The TPI physical layer handles the basic low-level serial communication. The TPI physical layer uses a bi-direc-  
tional, half-duplex serial receiver and transmitter. The physical layer includes serial-to-parallel and parallel-to-serial  
data conversion, start-of-frame detection, frame error detection, parity error detection, parity generation and colli-  
sion detection.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
95  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
The TPI is accessed via three pins, as follows:  
RESET:  
TPICLK:  
TPIDATA:  
Tiny Programming Interface enable input  
Tiny Programming Interface clock input  
Tiny Programming Interface data input/output  
In addition, the VCC and GND pins must be connected between the external programmer and the device. See Fig-  
ure 14-2.  
Figure 14-2. Using an External Programmer for In-System Programming via TPI  
+5V  
ATtiny4/5/9/10  
TPI  
CONN  
TPIDATA/PB0 PB3/RESET  
GND  
VCC  
PB2  
TPICLK/PB1  
APPLICATION  
NVM can be programmed at 5V, only. In some designs it may be necessary to protect components that can not tol-  
erate 5V with, for example, series resistors.  
14.3.1  
Enabling  
The following sequence enables the Tiny Programming Interface (see Figure 14-3 for guidance):  
• Apply 5V between VCC and GND  
• Depending on the method of reset to be used:  
– Either: wait tTOUT (see Table 16-4 on page 118) and then set the RESET pin low. This will reset the  
device and enable the TPI physical layer. The RESET pin must then be kept low for the entire  
programming session  
– Or: if the RSTDISBL configuration bit has been programmed, apply 12V to the RESET pin. The RESET  
pin must be kept at 12V for the entire programming session  
• Wait tRST (see Table 16-4 on page 118)  
• Keep the TPIDATA pin high for 16 TPICLK cycles  
Figure 14-3. Sequence for enabling the Tiny Programming Interface  
t
16 x TPICLK CYCLES  
RST  
RESET  
TPICLK  
TPIDATA  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
96  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
14.3.2  
14.3.3  
Disabling  
Provided that the NVM enable bit has been cleared, the TPI is automatically disabled if the RESET pin is released  
to inactive high state or, alternatively, if VHV is no longer applied to the RESET pin.  
If the NVM enable bit is not cleared a power down is required to exit TPI programming mode.  
See NVMEN bit in “TPISR – Tiny Programming Interface Status Register” on page 105.  
Frame Format  
The TPI physical layer supports a fixed frame format. A frame consists of one character, eight bits in length, and  
one start bit, a parity bit and two stop bits. Data is transferred with the least significant bit first.  
Figure 14-4. Serial frame format.  
TPICLK  
TPIDATA  
IDLE  
ST  
D0  
D1  
D7  
P
SP1  
SP2  
IDLE/ST  
Symbols used in Figure 14-4:  
ST: Start bit (always low)  
D0-D7: Data bits (least significant bit sent first)  
P: Parity bit (using even parity)  
SP1: Stop bit 1 (always high)  
SP2: Stop bit 2 (always high)  
14.3.4  
Parity Bit Calculation  
The parity bit is always calculated using even parity. The value of the bit is calculated by doing an exclusive-or of  
all the data bits, as follows:  
P = D0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 0  
where:  
P:  
D0-D7:  
Parity bit using even parity  
Data bits of the character  
14.3.5  
Supported Characters  
The BREAK character is equal to a 12 bit long low level. It can be extended beyond a bit-length of 12.  
Figure 14-5. Supported characters.  
DATA CHARACTER  
TPIDATA  
TPIDATA  
IDLE  
IDLE  
ST  
D0  
D1  
D7  
BREAK CHARACTER  
P
SP1  
SP2  
IDLE/ST  
IDLE/ST  
14.3.6  
Operation  
The TPI physical layer operates synchronously on the TPICLK provided by the external programmer. The depen-  
dency between the clock edges and data sampling or data change is shown in Figure 14-6. Data is changed at  
falling edges and sampled at rising edges.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
97  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 14-6. Data changing and Data sampling.  
TPICLK  
TPIDATA  
SAMPLE  
SETUP  
The TPI physical layer supports two modes of operation: Transmit and Receive. By default, the layer is in Receive  
mode, waiting for a start bit. The mode of operation is controlled by the access layer.  
14.3.7  
Serial Data Reception  
When the TPI physical layer is in receive mode, data reception is started as soon as a start bit has been detected.  
Each bit that follows the start bit will be sampled at the rising edge of the TPICLK and shifted into the shift register  
until the second stop bit has been received. When the complete frame is present in the shift register the received  
data will be available for the TPI access layer.  
There are three possible exceptions in the receive mode: frame error, parity error and break detection. All these  
exceptions are signalized to the TPI access layer, which then enters the error state and puts the TPI physical layer  
into receive mode, waiting for a BREAK character.  
• Frame Error Exception. The frame error exception indicates the state of the stop bit. The frame error exception  
is set if the stop bit was read as zero.  
• Parity Error Exception. The parity of the data bits is calculated during the frame reception. After the frame is  
received completely, the result is compared with the parity bit of the frame. If the comparison fails the parity  
error exception is signalized.  
• Break Detection Exception. The Break detection exception is given when a complete frame of all zeros has  
been received.  
14.3.8  
14.3.9  
Serial Data Transmission  
When the TPI physical layer is ready to send a new frame it initiates data transmission by loading the shift register  
with the data to be transmitted. When the shift register has been loaded with new data, the transmitter shifts one  
complete frame out on the TPIDATA line at the transfer rate given by TPICLK.  
If a collision is detected during transmission, the output driver is disabled. The TPI access layer enters the error  
state and the TPI physical layer is put into receive mode, waiting for a BREAK character.  
Collision Detection Exception  
The TPI physical layer uses one bi-directional data line for both data reception and transmission. A possible drive  
contention may occur, if the external programmer and the TPI physical layer drive the TPIDATA line simultane-  
ously. In order to reduce the effect of the drive contention, a collision detection mechanism is supported. The  
collision detection is based on the way the TPI physical layer drives the TPIDATA line.  
The TPIDATA line is driven by a tri-state, push-pull driver with internal pull-up. The output driver is always enabled  
when a logical zero is sent. When sending successive logical ones, the output is only driven actively during the first  
clock cycle. After this, the output driver is automatically tri-stated and the TPIDATA line is kept high by the internal  
pull-up. The output is re-enabled, when the next logical zero is sent.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
98  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
The collision detection is enabled in transmit mode, when the output driver has been disabled. The data line should  
now be kept high by the internal pull-up and it is monitored to see, if it is driven low by the external programmer. If  
the output is read low, a collision has been detected.  
There are some potential pit-falls related to the way collision detection is performed. For example, collisions cannot  
be detected when the TPI physical layer transmits a bit-stream of successive logical zeros, or bit-stream of alter-  
nating logical ones and zeros. This is because the output driver is active all the time, preventing polling of the  
TPIDATA line. However, within a single frame the two stop bits should always be transmitted as logical ones,  
enabling collision detection at least once per frame (as long as the frame format is not violated regarding the stop  
bits).  
The TPI physical layer will cease transmission when it detects a collision on the TPIDATA line. The collision is sig-  
nalized to the TPI access layer, which immediately changes the physical layer to receive mode and goes to the  
error state. The TPI access layer can be recovered from the error state only by sending a BREAK character.  
14.3.10 Direction Change  
In order to ensure correct timing of the half-duplex operation, a simple guard time mechanism has been added to  
the physical layer. When the TPI physical layer changes from receive to transmit mode, a configurable number of  
additional IDLE bits are inserted before the start bit is transmitted. The minimum transition time between receive  
and transmit mode is two IDLE bits. The total IDLE time is the specified guard time plus two IDLE bits.  
The guard time is configured by dedicated bits in the TPIPCR register. The default guard time value after the phys-  
ical layer is initialized is 128 bits.  
The external programmer looses control of the TPIDATA line when the TPI target changes from receive mode to  
transmit. The guard time feature relaxes this critical phase of the communication. When the external programmer  
changes from receive mode to transmit, a minimum of one IDLE bit should be inserted before the start bit is  
transmitted.  
14.4 Access Layer of Tiny Programming Interface  
The TPI access layer is responsible for handling the communication with the external programmer. The communi-  
cation is based on message format, where each message comprises an instruction followed by one or more byte-  
sized operands. The instruction is always sent by the external programmer but operands are sent either by the  
external programmer or by the TPI access layer, depending on the type of instruction issued.  
The TPI access layer controls the character transfer direction on the TPI physical layer. It also handles the recov-  
ery from the error state after exception.  
The Control and Status Space (CSS) of the Tiny Programming Interface is allocated for control and status registers  
in the TPI access Layer. The CSS consist of registers directly involved in the operation of the TPI itself. These reg-  
ister are accessible using the SLDCS and SSTCS instructions.  
The access layer can also access the data space, either directly or indirectly using the Pointer Register (PR) as the  
address pointer. The data space is accessible using the SLD, SST, SIN and SOUT instructions. The address  
pointer can be stored in the Pointer Register using the SLDPR instruction.  
14.4.1  
Message format  
Each message comprises an instruction followed by one or more byte operands. The instruction is always sent by  
the external programmer. Depending on the instruction all the following operands are sent either by the external  
programmer or by the TPI.  
The messages can be categorized in two types based on the instruction, as follows:  
• Write messages. A write message is a request to write data. The write message is sent entirely by the external  
programmer. This message type is used with the SSTCS, SST, STPR, SOUT and SKEY instructions.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
99  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
• Read messages. A read message is a request to read data. The TPI reacts to the request by sending the byte  
operands. This message type is used with the SLDCS, SLD and SIN instructions.  
All the instructions except the SKEY instruction require the instruction to be followed by one byte operand. The  
SKEY instruction requires 8 byte operands. For more information, see the TPI instruction set on page 100.  
14.4.2  
Exception Handling and Synchronisation  
Several situations are considered exceptions from normal operation of the TPI. When the TPI physical layer is in  
receive mode, these exceptions are:  
• The TPI physical layer detects a parity error.  
• The TPI physical layer detects a frame error.  
• The TPI physical layer recognizes a BREAK character.  
When the TPI physical layer is in transmit mode, the possible exceptions are:  
• The TPI physical layer detects a data collision.  
All these exceptions are signalized to the TPI access layer. The access layer responds to an exception by aborting  
any on-going operation and enters the error state. The access layer will stay in the error state until a BREAK char-  
acter has been received, after which it is taken back to its default state. As a consequence, the external  
programmer can always synchronize the protocol by simply transmitting two successive BREAK characters.  
14.5 Instruction Set  
The TPI has a compact instruction set that is used to access the TPI Control and Status Space (CSS) and the data  
space. The instructions allow the external programmer to access the TPI, the NVM Controller and the NVM memo-  
ries. All instructions except SKEY require one byte operand following the instruction. The SKEY instruction is  
followed by 8 data bytes. All instructions are byte-sized.  
The TPI instruction set is summarised in Table 14-1.  
Table 14-1. Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonic  
Operand  
Description  
Operation  
Serial LoaD from data space using indirect  
addressing  
SLD  
data, PR  
data DS[PR]  
Serial LoaD from data space using indirect  
addressing and post-increment  
data DS[PR]  
PR PR+1  
SLD  
data, PR+  
PR, data  
PR+, data  
PR, a  
Serial STore to data space using indirect  
addressing  
SST  
DS[PR] data  
Serial STore to data space using indirect  
addressing and post-increment  
DS[PR] data  
PR PR+1  
SST  
Serial STore to Pointer Register using direct  
addressing  
SSTPR  
PR[a] data  
SIN  
data, a  
a, data  
Serial IN from data space  
Serial OUT to data space  
data I/O[a]  
I/O[a] data  
SOUT  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
100  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 14-1. Instruction Set Summary (Continued)  
Mnemonic  
Operand  
Description  
Operation  
Serial LoaD from Control and Status space  
using direct addressing  
SLDCS  
data, a  
data CSS[a]  
Serial STore to Control and Status space  
using direct addressing  
SSTCS  
SKEY  
a, data  
CSS[a] data  
Key {8{data}}  
Key, {8{data}}  
Serial KEY  
14.5.1  
14.5.2  
14.5.3  
SLD - Serial LoaD from data space using indirect addressing  
The SLD instruction uses indirect addressing to load data from the data space to the TPI physical layer shift-regis-  
ter for serial read-out. The data space location is pointed by the Pointer Register (PR), where the address must  
have been stored before data is accessed. The Pointer Register is either left unchanged by the operation, or post-  
incremented, as shown in Table 14-2.  
Table 14-2. The Serial Load from Data Space (SLD) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
Register  
data DS[PR]  
data DS[PR]  
PR PR  
PR PR + 1  
0010 0000  
0010 0100  
Unchanged  
Post increment  
SST - Serial STore to data space using indirect addressing  
The SST instruction uses indirect addressing to store into data space the byte that is shifted into the physical layer  
shift register. The data space location is pointed by the Pointer Register (PR), where the address must have been  
stored before the operation. The Pointer Register can be either left unchanged by the operation, or it can be post-  
incremented, as shown in Table 14-3.  
Table 14-3. The Serial Store to Data Space (SLD) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
Register  
DS[PR] data  
DS[PR] data  
PR PR  
PR PR + 1  
0110 0000  
0110 0100  
Unchanged  
Post increment  
SSTPR - Serial STore to Pointer Register  
The SSTPR instruction stores the data byte that is shifted into the physical layer shift register to the Pointer Regis-  
ter (PR). The address bit of the instruction specifies which byte of the Pointer Register is accessed, as shown in  
Table 14-4.  
Table 14-4. The Serial Store to Pointer Register (SSTPR) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
PR[a] data  
0110 100a  
Bit ‘a’ addresses Pointer Register byte  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
101  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
14.5.4  
14.5.5  
14.5.6  
14.5.7  
SIN - Serial IN from i/o space using direct addressing  
The SIN instruction loads data byte from the I/O space to the shift register of the physical layer for serial read-out.  
The instuction uses direct addressing, the address consisting of the 6 address bits of the instruction, as shown in  
Table 14-5.  
Table 14-5. The Serial IN from i/o space (SIN) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
data I/O[a]  
0aa1 aaaa  
Bits marked ‘a’ form the direct, 6-bit addres  
SOUT - Serial OUT to i/o space using direct addressing  
The SOUT instruction stores the data byte that is shifted into the physical layer shift register to the I/O space. The  
instruction uses direct addressing, the address consisting of the 6 address bits of the instruction, as shown in Table  
14-6.  
Table 14-6. The Serial OUT to i/o space (SOUT) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
1aa1 aaaa  
I/O[a] data  
Bits marked ‘a’ form the direct, 6-bit addres  
SLDCS - Serial LoaD data from Control and Status space using direct addressing  
The SLDCS instruction loads data byte from the TPI Control and Status Space to the TPI physical layer shift regis-  
ter for serial read-out. The SLDCS instruction uses direct addressing, the direct address consisting of the 4  
address bits of the instruction, as shown in Table 14-7.  
Table 14-7. The Serial Load Data from Control and Status space (SLDCS) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
1000 aaaa  
data CSS[a]  
Bits marked ‘a’ form the direct, 4-bit addres  
SSTCS - Serial STore data to Control and Status space using direct addressing  
The SSTCS instruction stores the data byte that is shifted into the TPI physical layer shift register to the TPI Control  
and Status Space. The SSTCS instruction uses direct addressing, the direct address consisting of the 4 address  
bits of the instruction, as shown in Table 14-8.  
Table 14-8. The Serial STore data to Control and Status space (SSTCS) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
1100 aaaa  
CSS[a] data  
Bits marked ‘a’ form the direct, 4-bit addres  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
102  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
14.5.8  
SKEY - Serial KEY signaling  
The SKEY instruction is used to signal the activation key that enables NVM programming. The SKEY instruction is  
followed by the 8 data bytes that includes the activation key, as shown in Table 14-9.  
Table 14-9. The Serial KEY signaling (SKEY) Instruction  
Operation  
Opcode  
Remarks  
1110 0000  
Key {8[data}}  
Data bytes follow after instruction  
14.6 Accessing the Non-Volatile Memory Controller  
By default, NVM programming is not enabled. In order to access the NVM Controller and be able to program the  
non-volatile memories, a unique key must be sent using the SKEY instruction. The 64-bit key that will enable NVM  
programming is given in Table 14-10.  
Table 14-10. Enable Key for Non-Volatile Memory Programming  
Key  
Value  
NVM Program Enable  
0x1289AB45CDD888FF  
After the key has been given, the Non-Volatile Memory Enable (NVMEN) bit in the TPI Status Register (TPISR)  
must be polled until the Non-Volatile memory has been enabled.  
NVM programming is disabled by writing a logical zero to the NVMEN bit in TPISR.  
14.7 Control and Status Space Register Descriptions  
The control and status registers of the Tiny Programming Interface are mapped in the Control and Status Space  
(CSS) of the interface. These registers are not part of the I/O register map and are accessible via SLDCS and  
SSTCS instructions, only. The control and status registers are directly involved in configuration and status monitor-  
ing of the TPI.  
A summary of CSS registers is shown in Table 14-11.  
Table 14-11. Summary of Control and Status Registers  
Addr.  
Name  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
0x0F  
TPIIR  
Tiny Programming Interface Identification Code  
0x0E  
...  
Reserved  
0x03  
0x02  
0x01  
0x00  
TPIPCR  
Reserved  
TPISR  
GT2  
GT1  
GT0  
NVMEN  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
103  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
14.7.1  
TPIIR – Tiny Programming Interface Identification Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CSS: 0x0F  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
Programming Interface Identification Code  
TPIIR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:0 – TPIIC: Tiny Programming Interface Identification Code  
These bits give the identification code for the Tiny Programming Interface. The code can be used be the external  
programmer to identify the TPI. The identification code of the Tiny Programming Interface is shown in Table 14-12..  
Table 14-12. Identification Code for Tiny Programming Interface  
Code  
Value  
Interface Identification  
0x80  
14.7.2  
TPIPCR – Tiny Programming Interface Physical Layer Control Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
CSS: 0x02  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
GT2  
R/W  
0
GT1  
R/W  
0
GT0  
R/W  
0
TPIPCR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:3 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bits 2:0 – GT[2:0]: Guard Time  
These bits specify the number of additional IDLE bits that are inserted to the idle time when changing from recep-  
tion mode to transmission mode. Additional delays are not inserted when changing from transmission mode to  
reception.  
The total idle time when changing from reception to transmission mode is Guard Time plus two IDLE bits. Table  
14-13 shows the available Guard Time settings.  
Table 14-13. Guard Time Settings  
GT2  
0
GT1  
0
GT0  
0
Guard Time (Number of IDLE bits)  
+128 (default value)  
0
0
1
+64  
+32  
+16  
+8  
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
+4  
1
1
0
+2  
1
1
1
+0  
The default Guard Time is 128 IDLE bits. To speed up the communication, the Guard Time should be set to the  
shortest safe value.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
104  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
14.7.3  
TPISR – Tiny Programming Interface Status Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
NVMEN  
R/W  
0
0
CSS: 0x00  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
TPIPCR  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
• Bits 7:2, 0 – Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 1 – NVMEN: Non-Volatile Memory Programming Enabled  
NVM programming is enabled when this bit is set. The external programmer can poll this bit to verify the interface  
has been successfully enabled.  
NVM programming is disabled by writing this bit to zero.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
105  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
15. Memory Programming  
15.1 Features  
Two Embedded Non-Volatile Memories:  
– Non-Volatile Memory Lock bits (NVM Lock bits)  
– Flash Memory  
Four Separate Sections Inside Flash Memory:  
– Code Section (Program Memory)  
– Signature Section  
– Configuration Section  
– Calibration Section  
Read Access to All Non-Volatile Memories from Application Software  
Read and Write Access to Non-Volatile Memories from External programmer:  
– Read Access to All Non-Volatile Memories  
– Write Access to NVM Lock Bits, Flash Code Section and Flash Configuration Section  
External Programming:  
– Support for In-System and Mass Production Programming  
– Programming Through the Tiny Programming Interface (TPI)  
High Security with NVM Lock Bits  
15.2 Overview  
The Non-Volatile Memory (NVM) Controller manages all access to the Non-Volatile Memories. The NVM Controller  
controls all NVM timing and access privileges, and holds the status of the NVM.  
During normal execution the CPU will execute code from the code section of the Flash memory (program memory).  
When entering sleep and no programming operations are active, the Flash memory is disabled to minimize power  
consumption.  
All NVM are mapped to the data memory. Application software can read the NVM from the mapped locations of  
data memory using load instruction with indirect addressing.  
The NVM has only one read port and, therefore, the next instruction and the data can not be read simultaneously.  
When the application reads data from NVM locations mapped to the data space, the data is read first before the  
next instruction is fetched. The CPU execution is here delayed by one system clock cycle.  
Internal programming operations to NVM have been disabled and the NVM therefore appears to the application  
software as read-only. Internal write or erase operations of the NVM will not be successful.  
The method used by the external programmer for writing the Non-Volatile Memories is referred to as external pro-  
gramming. External programming can be done both in-system or in mass production. See Figure 14-2 on page 96.  
The external programmer can read and program the NVM via the Tiny Programming Interface (TPI).  
In the external programming mode all NVM can be read and programmed, except the signature and the calibration  
sections which are read-only.  
NVM can be programmed at 5V, only.  
15.3 Non-Volatile Memories  
The ATtiny4/5/9/10 have the following, embedded NVM:  
• Non-Volatile Memory Lock Bits  
• Flash memory with four separate sections  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
106  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
15.3.1  
Non-Volatile Memory Lock Bits  
The ATtiny4/5/9/10 provide two Lock Bits, as shown in Table 15-1.  
Table 15-1. Lock Bit Byte  
Lock Bit  
Bit No  
Description  
Default Value  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
NVLB2  
NVLB1  
Non-Volatile Lock Bit  
Non-Volatile Lock Bit  
The Lock Bits can be left unprogrammed ("1") or can be programmed ("0") to obtain the additional security shown  
in Table 15-2. Lock Bits can be erased to "1" with the Chip Erase command, only.  
Table 15-2. Lock Bit Protection Modes  
Memory Lock Bits (1)  
Lock Mode  
NVLB2 (2)  
NVLB1 (2)  
Protection Type  
1
1
1
No Memory Lock feature Enabled  
Further Programming of the Flash memory is disabled in  
the external programming mode. The configuration  
section bits are locked in the external programming  
mode  
2
3
1
0
0
0
Further programming and verification of the flash is  
disabled in the external programming mode. The  
configuration section bits are locked in the external  
programming mode  
Notes: 1. Program the configuration section bits before programming NVLB1 and NVLB2.  
2. "1" means unprogrammed, "0" means programmed  
15.3.2  
Flash Memory  
The embedded Flash memory of ATtiny4/5/9/10 has four separate sections, as shown in Table 15-3 and Table 15-  
3.  
Table 15-3. Number of Words and Pages in the Flash (ATtiny9/10)  
Section  
Size (Bytes)  
Page Size (Words)  
Pages  
WADDR  
[3:1]  
PADDR  
[9:4]  
Code (program memory)  
Configuration  
Signature (1)  
1024  
8
8
8
8
8
64  
1
[3:1]  
16  
8
2
[3:1]  
[4:4]  
Calibration (1)  
1
[3:1]  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
107  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Notes: 1. This section is read-only.  
Table 15-4. Number of Words and Pages in the Flash (ATtiny4/5)  
Section  
Size (Bytes)  
Page Size (Words)  
Pages  
WADDR  
[3:1]  
PADDR  
[9:4]  
Code (program memory)  
Configuration  
Signature (1)  
512  
8
8
8
8
8
32  
1
[3:1]  
16  
8
2
[3:1]  
[4:4]  
Calibration (1)  
1
[3:1]  
Notes: 1. This section is read-only.  
15.3.3  
Configuration Section  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 have one configuration byte, which resides in the configuration section. See Table 15-5.  
Table 15-5. Configuration bytes  
Configuration word data  
Configuration word address  
High byte  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Low byte  
0x00  
Configuration Byte 0  
Reserved  
0x01 ... 0x07  
Table 15-6 briefly describes the functionality of all configuration bits and how they are mapped into the configura-  
tion byte.  
Table 15-6. Configuration Byte 0  
Bit  
7:3  
2
Bit Name  
Description  
Default Value  
Reserved  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
1 (unprogrammed)  
CKOUT  
WDTON  
RSTDISBL  
System Clock Output  
Watchdog Timer always on  
External Reset disable  
1
0
Configuration bits are not affected by a chip erase but they can be cleared using the configuration section erase  
command (see “Erasing the Configuration Section” on page 112). Note that configuration bits are locked if Non-  
Volatile Lock Bit 1 (NVLB1) is programmed.  
15.3.3.1  
Latching of Configuration Bits  
All configuration bits are latched either when the device is reset or when the device exits the external programming  
mode. Changes to configuration bit values have no effect until the device leaves the external programming mode.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
108  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
15.3.4  
Signature Section  
The signature section is a dedicated memory area used for storing miscellaneous device information, such as the  
device signature. Most of this memory section is reserved for internal use, as shown in Table 15-7.  
Table 15-7. Signature bytes  
Signature word data  
Signature word address  
High byte  
Low byte  
0x00  
Device ID 1  
Manufacturer ID  
Device ID 2  
0x01  
Reserved for internal use  
Reserved for internal use  
0x02 ... 0x0F  
Reserved for internal use  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 have a three-byte signature code, which can be used to identify the device. The three bytes reside  
in the signature section, as shown in Table 15-7. The signature data for ATtiny4/5/9/10 is given in Table 15-8.  
Table 15-8. Signature codes  
Signature Bytes  
Part  
Manufacturer ID  
0x1E  
Device ID 1  
0x8F  
Device ID 2  
0x0A  
ATtiny4  
ATtiny5  
ATtiny9  
ATtiny10  
0x1E  
0x8F  
0x09  
0x1E  
0x90  
0x08  
0x1E  
0x90  
0x03  
15.3.5  
Calibration Section  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 have one calibration byte. The calibration byte contains the calibration data for the internal oscillator  
and resides in the calibration section, as shown in Table 15-9. During reset, the calibration byte is automatically  
written into the OSCCAL register to ensure correct frequency of the calibrated internal oscillator.  
Table 15-9. Calibration byte  
Calibration word data  
Calibration word address  
0x00  
High byte  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Low byte  
Internal oscillator calibration value  
Reserved  
0x01 ... 0x07  
15.3.5.1  
Latching of Calibration Value  
To ensure correct frequency of the calibrated internal oscillator the calibration value is automatically written into the  
OSCCAL register during reset.  
15.4 Accessing the NVM  
NVM lock bits, and all Flash memory sections are mapped to the data space as shown in Figure 5-1 on page 15.  
The NVM can be accessed for read and programming via the locations mapped in the data space.  
The NVM Controller recognises a set of commands that can be used to instruct the controller what type of pro-  
gramming task to perform on the NVM. Commands to the NVM Controller are issued via the NVM Command  
Register. See “NVMCMD - Non-Volatile Memory Command Register” on page 114. After the selected command  
has been loaded, the operation is started by writing data to the NVM locations mapped to the data space.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
109  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
When the NVM Controller is busy performing an operation it will signal this via the NVM Busy Flag in the NVM Con-  
trol and Status Register. See “NVMCSR - Non-Volatile Memory Control and Status Register” on page 114. The  
NVM Command Register is blocked for write access as long as the busy flag is active. This is to ensure that the  
current command is fully executed before a new command can start.  
Programming any part of the NVM will automatically inhibit the following operations:  
• All programming to any other part of the NVM  
• All reading from any NVM location  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 support only external programming. Internal programming operations to NVM have been disabled,  
which means any internal attempt to write or erase NVM locations will fail.  
15.4.1  
Addressing the Flash  
The data space uses byte accessing but since the Flash sections are accessed as words and organized in pages,  
the byte-address of the data space must be converted to the word-address of the Flash section. This is illustrated  
in Figure 15-1. Also, see Table 15-3 on page 107.  
The most significant bits of the data space address select the NVM Lock bits or the Flash section mapped to the  
data memory. The word address within a page (WADDR) is held by bits [WADDRMSB:1], and the page address  
(PADDR) by bits [PADDRMSB:WADDRMSB+1]. Together, PADDR and WADDR form the absolute address of a  
word in the Flash section.  
The least significant bit of the Flash section address is used to select the low or high byte of the word.  
Figure 15-1. Addressing the Flash Memory  
16  
PADDRMSB  
WADDRMSB+1 WADDRMSB  
1
PADDR  
WADDR  
0/1  
ADDRESS POINTER  
LOW/HIGH  
BYTE SELECT  
FLASH  
SECTION  
FLASH  
PAGE  
00  
01  
02  
...  
00  
WORD ADDRESS  
WITHIN A FLASH  
PAGE  
01  
...  
...  
...  
WORD  
PAGE  
PAGE ADDRESS  
WITHIN A FLASH  
SECTION  
...  
...  
PAGEEND  
SECTIONEND  
15.4.2  
Reading the Flash  
The Flash can be read from the data memory mapped locations one byte at a time. For read operations, the least  
significant bit (bit 0) is used to select the low or high byte in the word address. If this bit is zero, the low byte is read,  
and if it is one, the high byte is read.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
110  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
15.4.3  
Programming the Flash  
The Flash can be written word-by-word. Before writing a Flash word, the Flash target location must be erased.  
Writing to an un-erased Flash word will corrupt its content.  
The Flash is word-accessed for writing, and the data space uses byte-addressing to access Flash that has been  
mapped to data memory. It is therefore important to write the word in the correct order to the Flash, namely low  
bytes before high bytes. First, the low byte is written to the temporary buffer. Then, writing the high byte latches  
both the high byte and the low byte into the Flash word buffer, starting the write operation to Flash.  
The Flash erase operations can only performed for the entire Flash sections.  
The Flash programming sequence is as follows:  
1. Perform a Flash section erase or perform a Chip erase  
2. Write the Flash section word by word  
15.4.3.1  
Chip Erase  
The Chip Erase command will erase the entire code section of the Flash memory and the NVM Lock Bits. For  
security reasons, the NVM Lock Bits are not reset before the code section has been completely erased. Configura-  
tion, Signature and Calibration sections are not changed.  
Before starting the Chip erase, the NVMCMD register must be loaded with the CHIP_ERASE command. To start  
the erase operation a dummy byte must be written into the high byte of a word location that resides inside the Flash  
code section. The NVMBSY bit remains set until erasing has been completed. While the Flash is being erased nei-  
ther Flash buffer loading nor Flash reading can be performed.  
The Chip Erase can be carried out as follows:  
1. Write the CHIP_ERASE command to the NVMCMD register  
2. Start the erase operation by writing a dummy byte to the high byte of any word location inside the code  
section  
3. Wait until the NVMBSY bit has been cleared  
15.4.3.2  
Erasing the Code Section  
The algorithm for erasing all pages of the Flash code section is as follows:  
1. Write the SECTION_ERASE command to the NVMCMD register  
2. Start the erase operation by writing a dummy byte to the high byte of any word location inside the code  
section  
3. Wait until the NVMBSY bit has been cleared  
15.4.3.3  
Writing a Code Word  
The algorithm for writing a word to the code section is as follows:  
1. Write the WORD_WRITE command to the NVMCMD register  
2. Write the low byte of the data into the low byte of a word location  
3. Write the high byte of the data into the high byte of the same word location. This will start the Flash write  
operation  
4. Wait until the NVMBSY bit has been cleared  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
111  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
15.4.3.4  
Erasing the Configuration Section  
The algorithm for erasing the Configuration section is as follows:  
1. Write the SECTION_ERASE command to the NVMCMD register  
2. Start the erase operation by writing a dummy byte to the high byte of any word location inside the configu-  
ration section  
3. Wait until the NVMBSY bit has been cleared  
15.4.3.5  
Writing a Configuration Word  
The algorithm for writing a Configuration word is as follows.  
1. Write the WORD_WRITE command to the NVMCMD register  
2. Write the low byte of the data to the low byte of a configuration word location  
3. Write the high byte of the data to the high byte of the same configuration word location. This will start the  
Flash write operation.  
4. Wait until the NVMBSY bit has been cleared  
15.4.4  
15.4.5  
Reading NVM Lock Bits  
The Non-Volatile Memory Lock Byte can be read from the mapped location in data memory.  
Writing NVM Lock Bits  
The algorithm for writing the Lock bits is as follows.  
1. Write the WORD_WRITE command to the NVMCMD register.  
2. Write the lock bits value to the Non-Volatile Memory Lock Byte location. This is the low byte of the Non-  
Volatile Memory Lock Word.  
3. Start the NVM Lock Bit write operation by writing a dummy byte to the high byte of the NVM Lock Word  
location.  
4. Wait until the NVMBSY bit has been cleared.  
15.5 Self programming  
The ATtiny4/5/9/10 don't support internal programming.  
15.6 External Programming  
The method for programming the Non-Volatile Memories by means of an external programmer is referred to as  
external programming. External programming can be done both in-system or in mass production.  
The Non-Volatile Memories can be externally programmed via the Tiny Programming Interface (TPI). For details  
on the TPI, see “Programming interface” on page 95. Using the TPI, the external programmer can access the NVM  
control and status registers mapped to I/O space and the NVM memory mapped to data memory space.  
15.6.1  
Entering External Programming Mode  
The TPI must be enabled before external programming mode can be entered. The following procedure describes,  
how to enter the external programming mode after the TPI has been enabled:  
1. Make a request for enabling NVM programming by sending the NVM memory access key with the SKEY  
instruction.  
2. Poll the status of the NVMEN bit in TPISR until it has been set.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
112  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Refer to the Tiny Programming Interface description on page 95 for more detailed information of enabling the TPI  
and programming the NVM.  
15.6.2  
Exiting External Programming Mode  
Clear the NVM enable bit to disable NVM programming, then release the RESET pin.  
See NVMEN bit in “TPISR – Tiny Programming Interface Status Register” on page 105.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
113  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
15.7 Register Description  
15.7.1  
NVMCSR - Non-Volatile Memory Control and Status Register  
Bit  
7
NVMBSY  
R/W  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x32  
NVMCSR  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
R
0
0
• Bit 7 - NVMBSY: Non-Volatile Memory Busy  
This bit indicates the NVM memory (Flash memory and Lock Bits) is busy, being programmed. This bit is set when  
a program operation is started, and it remains set until the operation has been completed.  
• Bit 6:0 - Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always be read as zero.  
15.7.2  
NVMCMD - Non-Volatile Memory Command Register  
Bit  
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0x33  
NVMCMD[5:0]  
NVMCMD  
Read/Write  
Initial Value  
R
0
R
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
R/W  
0
• Bit 7:6 - Res: Reserved Bits  
These bits are reserved and will always read zero.  
• Bit 5:0 - NVMCMD[5:0]: Non-Volatile Memory Command  
These bits define the programming commands for the flash, as shown in Table 15-10.  
Table 15-10. NVM Programming commands  
NVMCMD  
Operation Type  
Binary  
Hex  
0x00  
0x10  
0x14  
0x1D  
Mnemonic  
Description  
No operation  
Chip erase  
0b000000  
0b010000  
0b010100  
0b011101  
NO_OPERATION  
CHIP_ERASE  
SECTION_ERASE  
WORD_WRITE  
General  
Section  
Word  
Section erase  
Word write  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
114  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
16. Electrical Characteristics  
16.1 Absolute Maximum Ratings*  
*NOTICE:  
Stresses beyond those listed under “Absolute  
Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent dam-  
age to the device. This is a stress rating only and  
functional operation of the device at these or  
other conditions beyond those indicated in the  
operational sections of this specification is not  
implied. Exposure to absolute maximum rating  
conditions for extended periods may affect  
device reliability.  
Operating Temperature.................................. -55C to +125C  
Storage Temperature..................................... -65°C to +150°C  
Voltage on any Pin except RESET  
with respect to Ground ................................-0.5V to VCC+0.5V  
Voltage on RESET with respect to Ground......-0.5V to +13.0V  
Maximum Operating Voltage ............................................ 6.0V  
DC Current per I/O Pin ............................................... 40.0 mA  
DC Current VCC and GND Pins................................ 200.0 mA  
16.2 DC Characteristics  
Table 16-1.  
Symbol  
DC Characteristics. TA = -40C to +85C  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min.  
Typ.  
Max.  
Units  
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V  
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V  
0.2VCC  
0.3VCC  
VIL  
Input Low Voltage  
-0.5  
V
(1)  
0.7VCC  
0.6VCC  
Input High-voltage  
Except RESET pin  
VCC = 1.8V - 2.4V  
VCC = 2.4V - 5.5V  
VCC +0.5(2)  
VCC +0.5(2)  
V
V
(1)  
VIH  
Input High-voltage  
RESET pin  
(1)  
VCC = 1.8V to 5.5V  
0.9VCC  
Output Low Voltage(3)  
Except RESET pin(5)  
IOL = 10 mA, VCC = 5V  
IOL = 5 mA, VCC = 3V  
0.6  
0.5  
VOL  
VOH  
ILIL  
V
Output High-voltage(4)  
Except RESET pin(5)  
IOH = -10 mA, VCC = 5V  
IOH = -5 mA, VCC = 3V  
4.3  
2.5  
V
Input Leakage  
Current I/O Pin  
Vcc = 5.5V, pin low  
(absolute value)  
<0.05  
<0.05  
1
1
µA  
µA  
Input Leakage  
Current I/O Pin  
Vcc = 5.5V, pin high  
(absolute value)  
ILIH  
RRST  
RPU  
Reset Pull-up Resistor  
I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor  
Vcc = 5.5V, input low  
Vcc = 5.5V, input low  
30  
20  
60  
50  
k  
k  
Analog Comparator Input  
Leakage Current  
VCC = 5V  
Vin = VCC/2  
IACLK  
-50  
50  
nA  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
115  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table 16-1.  
Symbol  
DC Characteristics. TA = -40C to +85C (Continued)  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min.  
Typ.  
0.2  
Max.  
0.5  
1.2  
4
Units  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
mA  
µA  
Active 1MHz, VCC = 2V  
Active 4MHz, VCC = 3V  
Active 8MHz, VCC = 5V  
Idle 1MHz, VCC = 2V  
Idle 4MHz, VCC = 3V  
Idle 8MHz, VCC = 5V  
WDT enabled, VCC = 3V  
WDT disabled, VCC = 3V  
0.8  
2.7  
Power Supply Current(6)  
0.02  
0.13  
0.6  
0.2  
0.5  
1.5  
10  
ICC  
4.5  
Power-down mode(7)  
0.15  
2
µA  
Notes: 1. “Min” means the lowest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as high.  
2. “Max” means the highest value where the pin is guaranteed to be read as low.  
3. Although each I/O port can sink more than the test conditions (10 mA at VCC = 5V, 5 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the sum of all IOL (for all ports) should not exceed 60 mA. If IOL exceeds the test conditions, VOL  
may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to sink current greater than the listed test condition.  
4. Although each I/O port can source more than the test conditions (10 mA at VCC = 5V, 5 mA at VCC = 3V) under steady state  
conditions (non-transient), the sum of all IOH (for all ports) should not exceed 60 mA. If IOH exceeds the test condition, VOH  
may exceed the related specification. Pins are not guaranteed to source current greater than the listed test condition.  
5. The RESET pin must tolerate high voltages when entering and operating in programming modes and, as a consequence,  
has a weak drive strength as compared to regular I/O pins. See Figure 17-25 on page 134, and Figure 17-26 on page 134.  
6. Values are with external clock using methods described in “Minimizing Power Consumption” on page 24. Power Reduction  
is enabled (PRR = 0xFF) and there is no I/O drive.  
7. BOD Disabled.  
16.3 Speed  
The maximum operating frequency of the device depends on VCC . The relationship between supply voltage and  
maximum operating frequency is piecewise linear, as shown in Figure 16-1.  
Figure 16-1. Maximum Frequency vs. VCC  
12 MHz  
8 MHz  
4 MHz  
1.8V  
2.7V  
4.5V  
5.5V  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
116  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
16.4 Clock Characteristics  
16.4.1  
Accuracy of Calibrated Internal Oscillator  
It is possible to manually calibrate the internal oscillator to be more accurate than default factory calibration. Note  
that the oscillator frequency depends on temperature and voltage. Voltage and temperature characteristics can be  
found in Figure 17-39 on page 141 and Figure 17-40 on page 141.  
Table 16-2. Calibration Accuracy of Internal RC Oscillator  
Calibration  
Method  
Accuracy at given Voltage  
& Temperature(1)  
Target Frequency  
VCC  
Temperature  
Factory  
Calibration  
8.0 MHz  
3V  
25C  
±10%  
±1%  
User  
Calibration  
Fixed frequency within:  
7.3 – 8.1 MHz  
Fixed voltage within:  
1.8V – 5.5V  
Fixed temp. within:  
-40C – 85C  
Notes: 1. Accuracy of oscillator frequency at calibration point (fixed temperature and fixed voltage).  
External Clock Drive  
16.4.2  
Figure 16-2. External Clock Drive Waveform  
V
IH1  
V
IL1  
Table 16-3. External Clock Drive Characteristics  
VCC = 1.8 - 5.5V  
VCC = 2.7 - 5.5V  
VCC = 4.5 - 5.5V  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Min.  
Max.  
Min.  
0
Max.  
Min.  
0
Max.  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Clock Frequency  
0
4
8
12  
Clock Period  
250  
100  
100  
125  
50  
83  
33  
33  
tCHCX  
tCLCX  
High Time  
ns  
Low Time  
50  
ns  
tCLCH  
Rise Time  
2.0  
2.0  
2
1
1
2
0.6  
0.6  
2
s  
tCHCL  
Fall Time  
s  
tCLCL  
Change in period from one clock cycle to the next  
%
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
117  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
16.5 System and Reset Characteristics  
Table 16-4. Reset, VLM, and Internal Voltage Characteristics  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min(1)  
Typ(1)  
Max(1)  
Units  
RESET Pin Threshold  
Voltage  
VRST  
0.2 VCC  
0.9VCC  
V
VCC = 1.8V  
VCC = 3V  
2000  
700  
400  
Minimum pulse width on  
RESET Pin  
tRST  
ns  
VCC = 5V  
tTOUT  
Time-out after reset  
32  
64  
128  
ms  
Note:  
1. Values are guidelines, only  
16.5.1  
Power-On Reset  
Table 16-5. Characteristics of Enhanced Power-On Reset. TA = -40 - 85C  
Symbol  
VPOR  
Parameter  
Min(1)  
Typ(1)  
Max(1)  
1.6  
Units  
V
Release threshold of power-on reset (2)  
Activation threshold of power-on reset (3)  
Power-On Slope Rate  
1.1  
1.4  
VPOA  
0.6  
1.3  
1.6  
V
SRON  
0.01  
V/ms  
Note:  
1. Values are guidelines, only  
2. Threshold where device is released from reset when voltage is rising  
3. The Power-on Reset will not work unless the supply voltage has been below VPOA  
16.5.2  
VCC Level Monitor  
Table 16-6. Voltage Level Monitor Thresholds  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ (1)  
1.4  
Max  
1.6  
1.8  
2.7  
4.5  
Units  
Trigger level VLM1L  
1.1  
1.4  
2.0  
3.2  
Trigger level VLM1H  
Trigger level VLM2  
1.6  
V
2.5  
Trigger level VLM3  
3.7  
Settling time VMLM2,VLM3 (VLM1H,VLM1L)  
5 (50)  
µs  
Note:  
1. Typical values at room temperature  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
118  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
16.6 Analog Comparator Characteristics  
Table 16-7. Analog Comparator Characteristics, TA = -40C - 85C  
Symbol  
VAIO  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
40  
Units  
mV  
Input Offset Voltage  
Input Leakage Current  
VCC = 5V, VIN = VCC / 2  
VCC = 5V, VIN = VCC / 2  
VCC = 2.7V  
< 10  
ILAC  
-50  
50  
nA  
750  
500  
100  
75  
Analog Propagation Delay  
(from saturation to slight overdrive)  
V
CC = 4.0V  
VCC = 2.7V  
CC = 4.0V  
VCC = 1.8V - 5.5  
tAPD  
ns  
Analog Propagation Delay  
(large step change)  
V
tDPD  
Digital Propagation Delay  
1
2
CLK  
16.7 ADC Characteristics (ATtiny5/10, only)  
Table 16-8. ADC Characteristics. T = -40C – 85C. VCC = 2.5V – 5.5V  
Symbol  
Parameter  
Condition  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
Resolution  
8
Bits  
VREF = VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
1.0  
1.0  
LSB  
Absolute accuracy  
(Including INL, DNL, and  
Quantization, Gain and Offset  
Errors)  
VREF = VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Noise Reduction Mode  
LSB  
LSB  
Integral Non-Linearity (INL)  
(Accuracy after Offset and  
Gain Calibration)  
VREF = VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
1.0  
Differential Non-linearity  
(DNL)  
VREF = VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
0.5  
1.0  
1.0  
LSB  
LSB  
LSB  
VREF = VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Gain Error  
VREF = VCC = 4V,  
ADC clock = 200 kHz  
Offset Error  
Conversion Time  
Clock Frequency  
Free Running Conversion  
65  
50  
260  
200  
µs  
kHz  
V
VIN  
Input Voltage  
GND  
VREF  
Input Bandwidth  
7.7  
kHz  
M  
LSB  
RAIN  
Analog Input Resistance  
ADC Conversion Output  
100  
0
255  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
119  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
16.8 Serial Programming Characteristics  
Figure 16-3. Serial Programming Timing  
Receive Mode  
Transmit Mode  
TPIDATA  
tIVCH  
tCHIX  
tCLOV  
TPICLK  
tCLCH  
tCHCL  
tCLCL  
Table 16-9. Serial Programming Characteristics, TA = -40C to 85C, VCC = 5V ± 5% (Unless Otherwise Noted)  
Symbol  
1/tCLCL  
tCLCL  
Parameter  
Min  
Typ  
Max  
Units  
MHz  
ns  
Clock Frequency  
2
Clock Period  
500  
200  
200  
50  
tCLCH  
tCHCH  
tIVCH  
Clock Low Pulse Width  
Clock High Pulse Width  
Data Input to Clock High Setup Time  
Data Input Hold Time After Clock High  
Data Output Valid After Clock Low Time  
ns  
ns  
ns  
tCHIX  
100  
ns  
tCLOV  
200  
ns  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
120  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17. Typical Characteristics  
The data contained in this section is largely based on simulations and characterization of similar devices in the  
same process and design methods. Thus, the data should be treated as indications of how the part will behave.  
The following charts show typical behavior. These figures are not tested during manufacturing. During characteri-  
sation devices are operated at frequencies higher than test limits but they are not guaranteed to function properly  
at frequencies higher than the ordering code indicates.  
All current consumption measurements are performed with all I/O pins configured as inputs and with internal pull-  
ups enabled. Current consumption is a function of several factors such as operating voltage, operating frequency,  
loading of I/O pins, switching rate of I/O pins, code executed and ambient temperature. The dominating factors are  
operating voltage and frequency.  
A sine wave generator with rail-to-rail output is used as clock source but current consumption in Power-Down  
mode is independent of clock selection. The difference between current consumption in Power-Down mode with  
Watchdog Timer enabled and Power-Down mode with Watchdog Timer disabled represents the differential current  
drawn by the Watchdog Timer.  
The current drawn from pins with a capacitive load may be estimated (for one pin) as follows:  
ICP VCC CL fSW  
where VCC = operating voltage, CL = load capacitance and fSW = average switching frequency of I/O pin.  
17.1 Supply Current of I/O Modules  
Tables and formulas below can be used to calculate additional current consumption for the different I/O modules in  
Active and Idle mode. Enabling and disabling of I/O modules is controlled by the Power Reduction Register. See  
“Power Reduction Register” on page 24 for details.  
Table 17-1. Additional Current Consumption for the different I/O modules (absolute values)  
PRR bit  
Typical numbers  
VCC = 3V, f = 4MHz  
40.0 uA  
V
CC = 2V, f = 1MHz  
VCC = 5V, f = 8MHz  
153.0 uA  
PRTIM0  
6.6 uA  
PRADC (1)  
29.6 uA  
88.3 uA  
333.3 uA  
Note:  
1. The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only  
Table 17-2 below can be used for calculating typical current consumption for other supply voltages and frequencies  
than those mentioned in the Table 17-1 above.  
Table 17-2. Additional Current Consumption (percentage) in Active and Idle mode  
Current consumption additional to  
active mode with external clock  
(see Figure 17-1 and Figure 17-2)  
Current consumption additional to  
idle mode with external clock  
(see Figure 17-7 and Figure 17-8)  
PRR bit  
PRTIM0  
PRADC (1)  
2.3 %  
6.7 %  
10.4 %  
28.8 %  
Note:  
1. The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
121  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.2 Active Supply Current  
Figure 17-1. Active Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY  
(PRR=0xFF)  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
4.0 V  
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
0
0.1  
0.2  
0.3  
0.4  
0.5  
0.6  
0.7  
0.8  
0.9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 17-2. Active Supply Current vs. frequency (1 - 12 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
(PRR=0xFF)  
5
4.5  
4
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
3.5  
3
2.5  
2
4.0 V  
1.5  
1
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
0.5  
0
1.8 V  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
Frequency (MHz)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
122  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-3. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal Oscillator, 8 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL OSCILLATOR, 8 MHz  
3.5  
3
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
2.5  
2
1.5  
1
0.5  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 17-4. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal Oscillator, 1 MHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL OSCILLATOR, 1 MHz  
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
123  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-5. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal Oscillator, 128 kHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL OSCILLATOR, 128 KHz  
0.12  
0.1  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
0.08  
0.06  
0.04  
0.02  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-6. Active Supply Current vs. VCC (External Clock, 32 kHz)  
ACTIVE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL OSCILLATOR, 32 KHz  
0.04  
0.035  
0.03  
0.025  
0.02  
0.015  
0.01  
0.005  
0
-40 °C  
85 °C  
25 °C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
124  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.3 Idle Supply Current  
Figure 17-7. Idle Supply Current vs. Low Frequency (0.1 - 1.0 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. LOW FREQUENCY  
(PRR=0xFF)  
0,1  
0,09  
0,08  
0,07  
0,06  
0,05  
0,04  
0,03  
0,02  
0,01  
0
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
4.0 V  
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
0,1  
0,2  
0,3  
0,4  
0,5  
0,6  
0,7  
0,8  
0,9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
Figure 17-8. Idle Supply Current vs. Frequency (1 - 12 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. FREQUENCY  
(PRR=0xFF)  
1
0,8  
0,6  
0,4  
0,2  
0
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
4.5 V  
4.0 V  
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
Frequency (MHz)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
125  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-9. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal Oscillator, 8 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 8 MHz  
0,7  
0,6  
0,5  
0,4  
0,3  
0,2  
0,1  
0
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-10. Idle Supply Current vs. VCC (Internal Oscillator, 1 MHz)  
IDLE SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
INTERNAL RC OSCILLATOR, 1 MHz  
0,7  
0,6  
0,5  
0,4  
0,3  
0,2  
0,1  
0
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
126  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.4 Power-down Supply Current  
Figure 17-11. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Disabled)  
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG TIMER DISABLED  
0.5  
0.45  
0.4  
85 °C  
0.35  
0.3  
0.25  
0.2  
0.15  
0.1  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
0.05  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-12. Power-down Supply Current vs. VCC (Watchdog Timer Enabled)  
POWER-DOWN SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG TIMER ENABLED  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
127  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.5 Pin Pull-up  
Figure 17-13. I/O pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
25 °C  
85 °C  
-40 °C  
0
0,2  
0,4  
0,6  
0,8  
1
1,2  
1,4  
1,6  
1,8  
2
VOP (V)  
Figure 17-14. I/O Pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. input Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
80  
70  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
25 °C  
85 °C  
-40 °C  
0
0,5  
1
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
VOP (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
128  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-15. I/O pin Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Input Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. INPUT VOLTAGE  
160  
140  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
25 °C  
85 °C  
-40 °C  
0
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
VOP (V)  
Figure 17-16. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 1.8V)  
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE  
40  
35  
30  
25  
20  
15  
10  
5
25 °C  
-40 °C  
85 °C  
0
0
0,2  
0,4  
0,6  
0,8  
1
1,2  
1,4  
1,6  
1,8  
2
VRESET (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
129  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-17. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 2.7V)  
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE  
60  
50  
40  
30  
20  
10  
0
25 °C  
-40 °C  
85 °C  
0
0,5  
1
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
VRESET (V)  
Figure 17-18. Reset Pull-up Resistor Current vs. Reset Pin Voltage (VCC = 5V)  
RESET PULL-UP RESISTOR CURRENT vs. RESET PIN VOLTAGE  
120  
100  
80  
60  
40  
20  
0
25 °C  
-40 °C  
85 °C  
0
0,5  
1
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
VRESET (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
130  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.6 Pin Driver Strength  
Figure 17-19. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 1.8V)  
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT  
VCC = 1.8V  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
IOL (mA)  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
Figure 17-20. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 3V)  
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT  
VCC = 3V  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
I
OL (mA)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
131  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-21. I/O pin Output Voltage vs. Sink Current (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT  
VCC = 5V  
1
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
85 °C  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
OL (mA)  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
I
Figure 17-22. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 1.8V)  
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT  
V
CC = 1.8V  
2
1.8  
1.6  
1.4  
1.2  
1
-40 °C  
25 °C  
0.8  
0.6  
0.4  
0.2  
0
85 °C  
0
0.5  
1
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
I
OH (mA)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
132  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-23. I/O Pin Output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 3V)  
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT  
VCC = 3V  
3.1  
2.9  
2.7  
2.5  
2.3  
2.1  
1.9  
1.7  
1.5  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
IOH (mA)  
Figure 17-24. I/O Pin output Voltage vs. Source Current (VCC = 5V)  
I/O PIN OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT  
VCC = 5V  
5.2  
5
4.8  
4.6  
4.4  
4.2  
4
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
0
2
4
6
8
10  
12  
14  
16  
18  
20  
IOH (mA)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
133  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-25. Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Sink Current  
OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SINK CURRENT  
RESET PIN AS I/O  
1
0.9  
0.8  
0.7  
0.6  
0.5  
0.4  
0.3  
0.2  
0.1  
0
3.0 V  
1.8 V  
5.0 V  
0
1
2
3
4
IOL (mA)  
Figure 17-26. Reset Pin as I/O, Output Voltage vs. Source Current  
OUTPUT VOLTAGE vs. SOURCE CURRENT  
RESET PIN AS I/O  
5
4
3
2
1
0
5.0 V  
3.0 V  
1.8 V  
0
0.2  
0.4  
0.6  
0.8  
1
1.2  
1.4  
1.6  
1.8  
2
IOH (mA)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
134  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.7 Pin Threshold and Hysteresis  
Figure 17-27. I/O Pin Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, IO Pin Read as ‘1’)  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'  
3,5  
3
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
2,5  
2
1,5  
1
0,5  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-28. I/O Pin Input threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, IO Pin Read as ‘0’)  
I/O PIN INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'  
3
2,5  
2
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
1,5  
1
0,5  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
135  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-29. I/O Pin Input Hysteresis vs. VCC  
I/O PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
1
0,9  
0,8  
0,7  
0,6  
-40 °C  
0,5  
25 °C  
0,4  
85 °C  
0,3  
0,2  
0,1  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-30. Reset Pin as I/O, Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin Read as ‘1’)  
RESET PIN AS I/O THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, RESET READ AS '1'  
3
2,5  
2
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
1,5  
1
0,5  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
136  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-31. Reset Pin as I/O, Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O pin Read as ‘0’)  
RESET PIN AS I/O THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, RESET READ AS '0'  
2,5  
2
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
1,5  
1
0,5  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-32. Reset Input Hysteresis vs. VCC (Reset Pin Used as I/O)  
RESET PIN AS I/O, INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
VIL, PIN READ AS "0"  
1
0,9  
0,8  
-40 °C  
0,7  
25 °C  
0,6  
0,5  
85 °C  
0,4  
0,3  
0,2  
0,1  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
137  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-33. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIH, I/O Pin Read as ‘1’)  
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIH, IO PIN READ AS '1'  
2,5  
2
1,5  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
1
85 °C  
0,5  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-34. Reset Input Threshold Voltage vs. VCC (VIL, I/O pin Read as ‘0’)  
RESET INPUT THRESHOLD VOLTAGE vs. VCC  
VIL, IO PIN READ AS '0'  
2,5  
2
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
1,5  
1
0,5  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
138  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-35. Reset Pin, Input Hysteresis vs. VCC  
RESET PIN INPUT HYSTERESIS vs. VCC  
1
0,8  
0,6  
0,4  
0,2  
0
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
17.8 Analog Comparator Offset  
Figure 17-36. Analog Comparator Offset  
ANALOG COMPARATOR OFFSET  
VCC = 5V  
0.006  
-40  
0.004  
0.002  
0
25  
85  
0
1
2
3
4
5
VIN  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
139  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.9 Internal Oscillator Speed  
Figure 17-37. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OPERATING VOLTAGE  
110  
109  
108  
107  
106  
105  
104  
103  
102  
101  
100  
99  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-38. Watchdog Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
WATCHDOG OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
110  
109  
108  
107  
106  
105  
104  
103  
102  
101  
100  
1.8 V  
2.7 V  
3.3 V  
4.0 V  
5.5 V  
-60  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
140  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-39. Calibrated Oscillator Frequency vs. VCC  
CALIBRATED 8.0MHz OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OPERATING VOLTAGE  
8.4  
8.2  
8
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
7.8  
7.6  
7.4  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 17-40. Calibrated Oscillator Frequency vs. Temperature  
CALIBRATED 8.0MHz OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. TEMPERATURE  
8.3  
8.2  
8.1  
8
7.9  
7.8  
7.7  
7.6  
5.0 V  
3.0 V  
1.8 V  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
141  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-41. Calibrated Oscillator Frequency vs, OSCCAL Value  
CALIBRATED 8.0MHz RC OSCILLATOR FREQUENCY vs. OSCCAL VALUE  
VCC = 3V  
16  
14  
12  
10  
8
25 °C  
85 °C  
-40 °C  
6
4
2
0
0
16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240  
OSCCAL (X1)  
17.10 VLM Thresholds  
Figure 17-42. VLM1L Threshold of VCC Level Monitor  
VLM THRESHOLD vs. TEMPERATURE  
VLM2:0 = 001  
1.42  
1.41  
1.4  
1.39  
1.38  
1.37  
1.36  
1.35  
1.34  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature (C)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
142  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-43. VLM1H Threshold of VCC Level Monitor  
VLM THRESHOLD vs. TEMPERATURE  
VLM2:0 = 010  
1.7  
1.65  
1.6  
1.55  
1.5  
1.45  
1.4  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature (C)  
Figure 17-44. VLM2 Threshold of VCC Level Monitor  
VLM THRESHOLD vs. TEMPERATURE  
VLM2:0 = 011  
2.48  
2.47  
2.46  
2.45  
2.44  
2.43  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature (C)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
143  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-45. VLM3 Threshold of VCC Level Monitorr2  
VLM THRESHOLD vs. TEMPERATURE  
VLM2:0 = 100  
3.9  
3.8  
3.7  
3.6  
3.5  
3.4  
-40  
-20  
0
20  
40  
60  
80  
100  
Temperature (C)  
17.11 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units  
Figure 17-46. ADC Current vs. VCC (ATtiny5/10, only)  
ADC CURRENT vs. VCC  
4.0 MHz FREQUENCY  
700  
600  
500  
400  
300  
200  
100  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
144  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-47. Analog Comparator Current vs. VCC  
ANALOG COMPARATOR CURRENT vs. VCC  
140  
120  
100  
80  
25 ˚C  
60  
40  
20  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
Figure 17-48. VCC Level Monitor Current vs. VCC  
VLM SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
0.35  
0.3  
VLM2:0 = 001  
VLM2:0 = 010  
VLM2:0 = 011  
0.25  
0.2  
VLM2:0 = 100  
0.15  
0.1  
0.05  
0
VLM2:0 = 000  
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
145  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Figure 17-49. Temperature Dependence of VLM Current vs. VCC  
VLM SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
VLM2:0 = 001  
350  
300  
250  
200  
150  
100  
50  
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
0
1.5  
2
2.5  
3
3.5  
4
4.5  
5
5.5  
V
CC (V)  
Figure 17-50. Watchdog Timer Current vs. VCC  
WATCHDOG TIMER CURRENT vs. VCC  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
-40 °C  
25 °C  
85 °C  
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
146  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.12 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth  
Figure 17-51. Reset Supply Current vs. VCC (0.1 - 1.0 MHz, excluding Current Through the Reset Pull-up)  
RESET SUPPLY CURRENT vs. VCC  
EXCLUDING CURRENT THROUGH THE RESET PULLUP  
0,5  
0,4  
5.5 V  
5.0 V  
0,3  
0,2  
0,1  
0
4.5 V  
4.0 V  
3.3 V  
2.7 V  
1.8 V  
0
0,1  
0,2  
0,3  
0,4  
0,5  
0,6  
0,7  
0,8  
0,9  
1
Frequency (MHz)  
Note:  
The default clock source for the device is always the internal 8 MHz oscillator. Hence, current consumption in reset  
remains unaffected by external clock signals.  
Figure 17-52. Minimum Reset Pulse Width vs. VCC  
MINIMUM RESET PULSE WIDTH vs. VCC  
2500  
2000  
1500  
1000  
500  
85 °C  
25 °C  
-40 °C  
0
1,5  
2
2,5  
3
3,5  
4
4,5  
5
5,5  
VCC (V)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
147  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
18. Register Summary  
Address  
Name  
Bit 7  
Bit 6  
Bit 5  
Bit 4  
Bit 3  
Bit 2  
Bit 1  
Bit 0  
Page  
0x3F  
0x3E  
0x3D  
0x3C  
0x3B  
0x3A  
0x39  
0x38  
0x37  
0x36  
0x35  
0x34  
0x33  
0x32  
0x31  
0x30  
0x2F  
0x2E  
0x2D  
0x2C  
0x2B  
0x2A  
0x29  
0x28  
0x27  
0x26  
0x25  
0x24  
0x23  
0x22  
0x21  
0x20  
0x1F  
0x1E  
0x1D  
0x1C  
0x1B  
0x1A  
0x19  
0x18  
0x17  
0x16  
0x15  
0x14  
0x13  
0x12  
0x11  
0x10  
0x0F  
0x0E  
0x0D  
0x0C  
0x0B  
0x0A  
0x09  
0x08  
0x07  
0x06  
0x05  
0x04  
0x03  
0x02  
0x01  
0x00  
SREG  
SPH  
I
T
H
S
V
N
Z
C
Page 12  
Page 12  
Page 12  
Page 11  
Page 34  
Page 25  
Page 21  
Stack Pointer High Byte  
Stack Pointer Low Byte  
SPL  
CCP  
CPU Change Protection Byte  
RSTFLR  
SMCR  
WDRF  
SM2  
EXTRF  
SM0  
PORF  
SE  
SM1  
OSCCAL  
Reserved  
CLKMSR  
CLKPSR  
PRR  
Oscillator Calibration Byte  
CLKMS1  
CLKPS1  
PRADC  
VLM1  
CLKMS0  
CLKPS0  
PRTIM0  
VLM0  
Page 21  
Page 22  
Page 26  
Page 33  
Page 114  
Page 114  
Page 32  
CLKPS3  
CLKPS2  
VLMCSR  
NVMCMD  
NVMCSR  
WDTCSR  
Reserved  
GTCCR  
TCCR0A  
TCCR0B  
TCCR0C  
TIMSK0  
TIFR0  
VLMF  
VLMIE  
VLM2  
NVM Comman  
NVMBSY  
WDIF  
WDP1  
WDP0  
WDIE  
WDP3  
WDE  
WDP2  
TSM  
COM0A1  
ICNC0  
FOC0A  
COM0A0  
ICES0  
FOC0B  
COM0B1  
PSR  
WGM00  
CS00  
Page 78  
Page 72  
Page 74  
Page 75  
Page 77  
Page 78  
Page 76  
Page 76  
Page 76  
Page 76  
Page 76  
Page 76  
Page 77  
Page 77  
COM0B0  
WGM01  
CS01  
WGM03  
WGM02  
CS02  
ICIE0  
ICF0  
OCIE0B  
OCF0B  
OCIE0A  
OCF0A  
TOIE0  
TOV0  
TCNT0H  
TCNT0L  
OCR0AH  
OCR0AL  
OCR0BH  
OCR0BL  
ICR0H  
Timer/Counter0 – Counter Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter0 – Counter Register Low Byte  
Timer/Counter0 – Compare Register A High Byte  
Timer/Counter0 – Compare Register A Low Byte  
Timer/Counter0 – Compare Register B High Byte  
Timer/Counter0 – Compare Register B Low Byte  
Timer/Counter0 - Input Capture Register High Byte  
Timer/Counter0 - Input Capture Register Low Byte  
ICR0L  
Reserved  
Reserved  
ACSR  
ACIC  
ACD  
ACO  
ACI  
ACIE  
ACIS1  
ACIS0  
Page 80  
Reserved  
ADCSRA  
ADCSRB  
ADMUX  
Reserved  
ADCL  
ADEN  
ADSC  
ADATE  
ADIF  
ADIE  
ADPS2  
ADTS2  
ADPS1  
ADTS1  
MUX1  
ADPS0  
ADTS0  
MUX0  
Page 92  
Page 93  
Page 92  
ADC Conversion Result  
Page 94  
Reserved  
DIDR0  
ADC3D  
ADC2D  
ADC1D  
ADC0D  
Page 81, Page 94  
Reserved  
EICRA  
ISC01  
ISC00  
Page 37  
Page 38  
Page 38  
Page 39  
Page 39  
Page 39  
EIFR  
INTF0  
EIMSK  
INT0  
PCICR  
PCIE0  
PCIFR  
PCIF0  
PCMSK  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
PORTCR  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
Reserved  
PUEB  
PCINT3  
PCINT2  
PCINT1  
PCINT0  
BBMB  
Page 50  
PUEB3  
PORTB3  
DDRB3  
PINB3  
PUEB2  
PORTB2  
DDRB2  
PINB2  
PUEB1  
PORTB1  
DDRB1  
PINB1  
PUEB0  
PORTB0  
DDRB0  
PINB0  
Page 50  
Page 51  
Page 51  
Page 51  
PORTB  
DDRB  
PINB  
Note:  
1. For compatibility with future devices, reserved bits should be written to zero if accessed. Reserved I/O memory addresses  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
148  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
should never be written.  
2. I/O Registers within the address range 0x00 - 0x1F are directly bit-accessible using the SBI and CBI instructions. In these  
registers, the value of single bits can be checked by using the SBIS and SBIC instructions.  
3. Some of the Status Flags are cleared by writing a logical one to them. Note that, unlike most other AVRs, the CBI and SBI  
instructions will only operation the specified bit, and can therefore be used on registers containing such Status Flags. The  
CBI and SBI instructions work with registers 0x00 to 0x1F only.  
4. The ADC is available in ATtiny5/10, only.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
149  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
19. Instruction Set Summary  
Mnemonics  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
ARITHMETIC AND LOGIC INSTRUCTIONS  
ADD  
ADC  
SUB  
SUBI  
SBC  
SBCI  
AND  
ANDI  
OR  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, Rr  
Rd  
Add without Carry  
Add with Carry  
Rd Rd + Rr  
Z,C,N,V,S,H  
Z,C,N,V,S,H  
Z,C,N,V,S,H  
Z,C,N,V,S,H  
Z,C,N,V,S,H  
Z,C,N,V,S,H  
Z,N,V,S  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Rd Rd + Rr + C  
Rd Rd - Rr  
Rd Rd - K  
Subtract without Carry  
Subtract Immediate  
Subtract with Carry  
Rd Rd - Rr - C  
Rd Rd - K - C  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd Rd K  
Subtract Immediate with Carry  
Logical AND  
Logical AND with Immediate  
Logical OR  
Z,N,V,S  
Rd Rd v Rr  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V,S  
ORI  
Logical OR with Immediate  
Exclusive OR  
Z,N,V,S  
EOR  
COM  
NEG  
SBR  
CBR  
INC  
Rd Rd Rr  
Rd $FF Rd  
Rd $00 Rd  
Rd Rd v K  
Z,N,V,S  
One’s Complement  
Two’s Complement  
Set Bit(s) in Register  
Clear Bit(s) in Register  
Increment  
Z,C,N,V,S  
Z,C,N,V,S,H  
Z,N,V,S  
Rd  
Rd,K  
Rd,K  
Rd  
Rd Rd ($FFh - K)  
Rd Rd + 1  
Z,N,V,S  
Z,N,V,S  
DEC  
TST  
CLR  
SER  
Rd  
Decrement  
Rd Rd 1  
Z,N,V,S  
Rd  
Test for Zero or Minus  
Clear Register  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd Rd Rd  
Rd $FF  
Z,N,V,S  
Rd  
Z,N,V,S  
Rd  
Set Register  
None  
BRANCH INSTRUCTIONS  
RJMP  
IJMP  
k
Relative Jump  
PC PC + k + 1  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
I
2
2
Indirect Jump to (Z)  
PC(15:0) Z, PC(21:16) 0  
PC PC + k + 1  
RCALL  
ICALL  
RET  
k
Relative Subroutine Call  
Indirect Call to (Z)  
3/4  
3/4  
4/5  
4/5  
1/2/3  
1
PC(15:0) Z, PC(21:16) 0  
PC STACK  
Subroutine Return  
RETI  
Interrupt Return  
PC STACK  
CPSE  
CP  
Rd,Rr  
Compare, Skip if Equal  
Compare  
if (Rd = Rr) PC PC + 2 or 3  
Rd Rr  
None  
Z, C,N,V,S,H  
Z, C,N,V,S,H  
Z, C,N,V,S,H  
None  
Rd,Rr  
CPC  
Rd,Rr  
Compare with Carry  
Rd Rr C  
1
CPI  
Rd,K  
Compare with Immediate  
Skip if Bit in Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in Register is Set  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register Cleared  
Skip if Bit in I/O Register is Set  
Branch if Status Flag Set  
Branch if Status Flag Cleared  
Branch if Equal  
Rd K  
1
SBRC  
SBRS  
SBIC  
Rr, b  
if (Rr(b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (Rr(b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (I/O(A,b)=0) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (I/O(A,b)=1) PC PC + 2 or 3  
if (SREG(s) = 1) then PCPC+k + 1  
if (SREG(s) = 0) then PCPC+k + 1  
if (Z = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (Z = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (C = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (N V= 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (H = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (T = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if (V = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
if ( I = 1) then PC PC + k + 1  
if ( I = 0) then PC PC + k + 1  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2/3  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
1/2  
Rr, b  
None  
None  
A, b  
A, b  
s, k  
s, k  
k
SBIS  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
BRBS  
BRBC  
BREQ  
BRNE  
BRCS  
BRCC  
BRSH  
BRLO  
BRMI  
BRPL  
BRGE  
BRLT  
BRHS  
BRHC  
BRTS  
BRTC  
BRVS  
BRVC  
BRIE  
BRID  
k
Branch if Not Equal  
k
Branch if Carry Set  
k
Branch if Carry Cleared  
Branch if Same or Higher  
Branch if Lower  
k
k
k
Branch if Minus  
k
Branch if Plus  
k
Branch if Greater or Equal, Signed  
Branch if Less Than Zero, Signed  
Branch if Half Carry Flag Set  
Branch if Half Carry Flag Cleared  
Branch if T Flag Set  
k
k
k
k
k
Branch if T Flag Cleared  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Set  
Branch if Overflow Flag is Cleared  
Branch if Interrupt Enabled  
Branch if Interrupt Disabled  
k
k
k
k
BIT AND BIT-TEST INSTRUCTIONS  
LSL  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
Rd  
s
Logical Shift Left  
Logical Shift Right  
Rotate Left Through Carry  
Rotate Right Through Carry  
Arithmetic Shift Right  
Swap Nibbles  
Rd(n+1) Rd(n), Rd(0) 0  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), Rd(7) 0  
Rd(0)C,Rd(n+1)Rd(n),CRd(7)  
Rd(7)C,Rd(n)Rd(n+1),CRd(0)  
Rd(n) Rd(n+1), n=0..6  
Rd(3..0)Rd(7..4),Rd(7..4)Rd(3..0)  
SREG(s) 1  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V,H  
Z,C,N,V  
Z,C,N,V  
None  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
LSR  
ROL  
ROR  
ASR  
SWAP  
BSET  
BCLR  
SBI  
Flag Set  
SREG(s)  
SREG(s)  
None  
s
Flag Clear  
SREG(s) 0  
A, b  
Set Bit in I/O Register  
I/O(A, b) 1  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
150  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Mnemonics  
Operands  
Description  
Operation  
Flags  
#Clocks  
CBI  
A, b  
Clear Bit in I/O Register  
I/O(A, b) 0  
T Rr(b)  
Rd(b) T  
C 1  
C 0  
N 1  
N 0  
Z 1  
None  
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BST  
BLD  
SEC  
CLC  
SEN  
CLN  
SEZ  
CLZ  
SEI  
Rr, b  
Bit Store from Register to T  
Bit load from T to Register  
Set Carry  
T
Rd, b  
None  
C
C
N
N
Z
Clear Carry  
Set Negative Flag  
Clear Negative Flag  
Set Zero Flag  
Clear Zero Flag  
Z 0  
Z
Global Interrupt Enable  
Global Interrupt Disable  
Set Signed Test Flag  
Clear Signed Test Flag  
Set Two’s Complement Overflow.  
Clear Two’s Complement Overflow  
Set T in SREG  
I 1  
I
CLI  
I 0  
I
SES  
CLS  
SEV  
CLV  
SET  
CLT  
SEH  
CLH  
S 1  
S
S
V
V
T
S 0  
V 1  
V 0  
T 1  
Clear T in SREG  
T 0  
T
Set Half Carry Flag in SREG  
Clear Half Carry Flag in SREG  
H 1  
H 0  
H
H
DATA TRANSFER INSTRUCTIONS  
MOV  
LDI  
LD  
Rd, Rr  
Rd, K  
Rd, X  
Rd, X+  
Rd, - X  
Rd, Y  
Rd, Y+  
Rd, - Y  
Rd, Z  
Rd, Z+  
Rd, -Z  
Rd, k  
X, Rr  
Copy Register  
Rd Rr  
Rd K  
Rd (X)  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
None  
1
1
Load Immediate  
Load Indirect  
1/2  
2
LD  
Load Indirect and Post-Increment  
Load Indirect and Pre-Decrement  
Load Indirect  
Rd (X), X X + 1  
X X - 1, Rd (X)  
Rd (Y)  
LD  
2/3  
1/2  
2
LD  
LD  
Load Indirect and Post-Increment  
Load Indirect and Pre-Decrement  
Load Indirect  
Rd (Y), Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, Rd (Y)  
Rd (Z)  
LD  
2/3  
1/2  
2
LD  
LD  
Load Indirect and Post-Increment  
Load Indirect and Pre-Decrement  
Store Direct from SRAM  
Store Indirect  
Rd (Z), Z Z+1  
Z Z - 1, Rd (Z)  
Rd k)  
LD  
2/3  
1
LDS  
ST  
(X) Rr  
1
ST  
X+, Rr  
- X, Rr  
Y, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-Increment  
Store Indirect and Pre-Decrement  
Store Indirect  
(X) Rr, X X + 1  
X X - 1, (X) Rr  
(Y) Rr  
1
ST  
2
ST  
1
ST  
Y+, Rr  
- Y, Rr  
Z, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-Increment  
Store Indirect and Pre-Decrement  
Store Indirect  
(Y) Rr, Y Y + 1  
Y Y - 1, (Y) Rr  
(Z) Rr  
1
ST  
2
ST  
1
ST  
Z+, Rr  
-Z, Rr  
k, Rr  
Store Indirect and Post-Increment.  
Store Indirect and Pre-Decrement  
Store Direct to SRAM  
(Z) Rr, Z Z + 1  
Z Z - 1, (Z) Rr  
(k) Rr  
1
ST  
2
STS  
IN  
1
Rd, A  
A, Rr  
In from I/O Location  
Rd I/O (A)  
1
OUT  
PUSH  
POP  
Out to I/O Location  
I/O (A) Rr  
1
Rr  
Push Register on Stack  
Pop Register from Stack  
STACK Rr  
2
Rd  
Rd STACK  
2
MCU CONTROL INSTRUCTIONS  
BREAK  
Break  
None  
(see specific descr. for Break)  
1
1
1
1
NOP  
No Operation  
Sleep  
None  
None  
None  
SLEEP  
WDR  
(see specific descr. for Sleep)  
(see specific descr. for WDR)  
Watchdog Reset  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
151  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
20. Ordering Information  
20.1 ATtiny4  
Supply Voltage  
Speed (1)  
Temperature  
Package (2)  
6ST1  
Ordering Code (3)  
ATtiny4-TSHR(5)  
ATtiny4-MAHR (6)  
Industrial  
12 MHz  
(-40C to 85C) (4)  
8MA4  
1.8 – 5.5V  
Extended  
10 MHz  
6ST1  
ATtiny4-TS8R (5)  
(-40C to 125C) (6)  
Notes: 1. For speed vs. supply voltage, see section 16.3 “Speed” on page 116.  
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazard-  
ous Substances (RoHS). NiPdAu finish.  
3. Tape and reel.  
4. Can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Atmel sales office for ordering information and minimum quantities.  
5. Top/bottomside markings:  
Top: T4x, where x = die revision  
– Bottom: zHzzz or z8zzz, where H = (-40C to 85C), and 8 = (-40C to 125C)  
6. For typical and Electrical characteristics for this device please consult Appendix A, ATtiny4/5/9/10 Specification at 125°C.  
Package Type  
6ST1  
8MA4  
6-lead, 2.90 x 1.60 mm Plastic Small Outline Package (SOT23)  
8-pad, 2 x 2 x 0.6 mm Plastic Ultra Thin Dual Flat No Lead (UDFN)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
152  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
20.2 ATtiny5  
Supply Voltage  
Speed (1)  
Temperature  
Package (2)  
6ST1  
Ordering Code (3)  
ATtiny5-TSHR (5)  
ATtiny5-MAHR (6)  
Industrial  
12 MHz  
(-40C to 85C) (4)  
8MA4  
1.8 – 5.5V  
Extended  
10 MHz  
6ST1  
ATtiny5-TS8R (5)  
(-40C to 125C) (6)  
Notes: 1. For speed vs. supply voltage, see section 16.3 “Speed” on page 116.  
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazard-  
ous Substances (RoHS). NiPdAu finish.  
3. Tape and reel.  
4. Can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Atmel sales office for ordering information and minimum quantities.  
5. Top/bottomside markings:  
Top: T5x, where x = die revision  
– Bottom: zHzzz or z8zzz, where H = (-40C to 85C), and 8 = (-40C to 125C)  
6. For typical and Electrical characteristics for this device please consult Appendix A, ATtiny4/5/9/10 Specification at 125°C.  
Package Type  
6ST1  
8MA4  
6-lead, 2.90 x 1.60 mm Plastic Small Outline Package (SOT23)  
8-pad, 2 x 2 x 0.6 mm Plastic Ultra Thin Dual Flat No Lead (UDFN)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
153  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
20.3 ATtiny9  
Supply Voltage  
Speed (1)  
Temperature  
Package (2)  
6ST1  
Ordering Code (3)  
ATtiny9-TSHR (5)  
ATtiny9-MAHR (6)  
Industrial  
12 MHz  
(-40C to 85C) (4)  
8MA4  
1.8 – 5.5V  
Extended  
10 MHz  
6ST1  
ATtiny9-TS8R (5)  
(-40C to 125C) (6)  
Notes: 1. For speed vs. supply voltage, see section 16.3 “Speed” on page 116.  
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazard-  
ous Substances (RoHS). NiPdAu finish.  
3. Tape and reel.  
4. Can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Atmel sales office for ordering information and minimum quantities.  
5. Top/bottomside markings:  
Top: T9x, where x = die revision  
– Bottom: zHzzz or z8zzz, where H = (-40C to 85C), and 8 = (-40C to 125C)  
6. For typical and Electrical characteristics for this device please consult Appendix A, ATtiny4/5/9/10 Specification at 125°C.  
Package Type  
6ST1  
8MA4  
6-lead, 2.90 x 1.60 mm Plastic Small Outline Package (SOT23)  
8-pad, 2 x 2 x 0.6 mm Plastic Ultra Thin Dual Flat No Lead (UDFN)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
154  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
20.4 ATtiny10  
Supply Voltage  
Speed (1)  
Temperature  
Package (2)  
6ST1  
Ordering Code (3)  
ATtiny10-TSHR (5)  
ATtiny10-MAHR (6)  
Industrial  
12 MHz  
(-40C to 85C) (4)  
8MA4  
1.8 – 5.5V  
Extended  
10 MHz  
6ST1  
ATtiny10-TS8R (5)  
(-40C to 125C) (6)  
Notes: 1. For speed vs. supply voltage, see section 16.3 “Speed” on page 116.  
2. All packages are Pb-free, halide-free and fully green and they comply with the European directive for Restriction of Hazard-  
ous Substances (RoHS). NiPdAu finish.  
3. Tape and reel.  
4. Can also be supplied in wafer form. Contact your local Atmel sales office for ordering information and minimum quantities.  
5. Top/bottomside markings:  
Top: T10x, where x = die revision  
– Bottom: zHzzz or z8zzz, where H = (-40C to 85C), and 8 = (-40C to 125C)  
6. For typical and Electrical characteristics for this device please consult Appendix A, ATtiny4/5/9/10 Specification at 125°C.  
Package Type  
6ST1  
8MA4  
6-lead, 2.90 x 1.60 mm Plastic Small Outline Package (SOT23)  
8-pad, 2 x 2 x 0.6 mm Plastic Ultra Thin Dual Flat No Lead (UDFN)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
155  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
21. Packaging Information  
21.1 6ST1  
D
A
5
6
4
A2  
A1  
E
E1  
A
Pin #1 ID  
C
0.10  
SEATING PLANE  
A
1
3
2
C
Side View  
b
e
Top View  
A2  
A
C
0.10  
SEATING PLANE  
c
0.25  
C
A1  
SEATING PLANE  
View A-A  
C
SEE VIEW B  
O
L
View B  
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
MIN  
MAX  
1.45  
0.15  
1.30  
3.00  
3.00  
1.75  
0.55  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
A1  
A2  
D
E
0
0.90  
2.80  
2.60  
1.50  
0.30  
2.90  
2.80  
1.60  
0.45  
0.95 BSC  
2
E1  
L
Notes: 1. This package is compliant with JEDEC specification MO-178 Variation AB  
2. Dimension D does not include mold Flash, protrusions or gate burrs.  
Mold Flash, protrustion or gate burrs shall not exceed 0.25 mm per end.  
3. Dimension b does not include dambar protrusion. Allowable dambar  
protrusion shall not cause the lead width to exceed the maximum  
b dimension by more than 0.08 mm  
e
b
0.30  
0.09  
0°  
0.50  
0.20  
8°  
3
c
θ
4. Die is facing down after trim/form.  
6/30/08  
GPC  
TAQ  
DRAWING NO.  
TITLE  
REV.  
6ST1, 6-lead, 2.90 x 1.60 mm Plastic Small Outline  
Package Drawing Contact:  
packagedrawings@atmel.com  
6ST1  
A
Package (SOT23)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
156  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
21.2 8MA4  
8x  
8
7
6
5
0.05 c  
c
0.05 c  
E
SIDE VIEW  
Pin 1 ID  
1
2
3
4
D
A1  
TOP VIEW  
A
D2  
e
5
8
COMMON DIMENSIONS  
(Unit of Measure = mm)  
K
MIN  
MAX  
0.60  
0.05  
0.30  
2.05  
1.60  
2.05  
1.00  
NOM  
NOTE  
SYMBOL  
A
E2  
C0.2  
A1  
b
0.00  
0.20  
1.95  
1.40  
1.95  
0.80  
D
2.00  
1.50  
2.00  
0.90  
0.50  
0.30  
D2  
E
L
4
1
b
E2  
e
BOTTOM VIEW  
L
0.20  
0.20  
0.40  
K
1. ALL DIMENSIONS ARE IN mm. ANGLES IN DEGREES.  
2. COPLANARITY APPLIES TO THE EXPOSED PAD AS WELL AS THE  
TERMINALS COPLANARITY SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.05 mm.  
3. WARPAGE SHALL NOT EXCEED 0.05 mm.  
Note:  
4. REFER JEDEC MO-236/MO-252  
12/17/09  
GPC  
YAG  
DRAWING NO.  
TITLE  
REV.  
8PAD, 2x2x0.6 mm body, 0.5 mm pitch,  
Package Drawing Contact:  
packagedrawings@atmel.com  
0.9x1.5 mm exposed pad, Saw singulated  
Thermally enhanced plastic ultra thin dual flat  
8MA4  
A
no lead package (UDFN/USON)  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
157  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
22. Errata  
The revision letters in this section refer to the revision of the corresponding ATtiny4/5/9/10 device.  
22.1 ATtiny4  
22.1.1  
Rev. E  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.1.2  
Rev. D  
ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
The device meets ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
Always use proper ESD protection measures (Class 1C) when handling integrated circuits before and during  
assembly.  
2. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.1.3  
Rev. A – C  
Not sampled.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
158  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
22.2 ATtiny5  
22.2.1  
Rev. E  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.2.2  
Rev. D  
ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
The device meets ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
Always use proper ESD protection measures (Class 1C) when handling integrated circuits before and during  
assembly.  
2. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.2.3  
Rev. A – C  
Not sampled.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
159  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
22.3 ATtiny9  
22.3.1  
Rev. E  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.3.2  
Rev. D  
ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
The device meets ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
Always use proper ESD protection measures (Class 1C) when handling integrated circuits before and during  
assembly.  
2. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.3.3  
Rev. A – C  
Not sampled.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
160  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
22.4 ATtiny10  
22.4.1  
Rev. E  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.4.2  
Rev. C – D  
ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
Programming Lock Bits  
1. ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V  
The device meets ESD HBM (ESD STM 5.1) level ±1000V.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
Always use proper ESD protection measures (Class 1C) when handling integrated circuits before and during  
assembly.  
2. Programming Lock Bits  
Programming Lock Bits to a lock mode equal or lower than the current causes one word of Flash to be cor-  
rupted. The location of the corruption is random.  
Problem Fix / Workaround  
When programming Lock Bits, make sure lock mode is not set to present, or lower levels.  
22.4.3  
Rev. A – B  
Not sampled.  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
161  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
23. Datasheet Revision History  
23.1 Rev. 8127F – 02/13  
1. Updated:  
– Ordering information on page 152, page 153, page 154, and page 155  
23.2 Rev. 8127E – 11/11  
1. Updated:  
– Device status from Preliminary to Final  
– Ordering information on page 152, page 153, page 154, and page 155  
23.3 Rev. 8127D – 02/10  
1. Added UDFN package in “Features” on page 1, “Pin Configurations” on page 2, “Ordering Information” on  
page 152, and in “Packaging Information” on page 156  
2. Updated Figure 8-2 and Figure 8-3 in Section 8.2.1 “Power-on Reset” on page 27  
3. Updated Section 8.2.3 “External Reset” on page 29  
4. Updated Figures 17-36 and 17-51 in “Typical Characteristics”  
5. Updated notes in Section 20. “Ordering Information” on pages 152 - 155  
6. Added device Rev. E in Section 22. “Errata” on page 158  
23.4 Rev. 8127C – 10/09  
1. Updated values and notes:  
Table 16-1 in Section 16.2 “DC Characteristics” on page 115  
Table 16-3 in Section 16.4 “Clock Characteristics” on page 117  
Table 16-6 in Section 16.5.2 “VCC Level Monitor” on page 118  
Table 16-9 in Section 16.8 “Serial Programming Characteristics” on page 120  
2. Updated Figure 16-1 in Section 16.3 “Speed” on page 116  
3. Added Typical Characteristics Figure 17-36 in Section 17.8 “Analog Comparator Offset” on page 139.  
Also, updated some other plots in Typical Characteristics.  
4. Added topside and bottomside marking notes in Section 20. “Ordering Information” on page 152, up to  
page 155  
5. Added ESD errata, see Section 22. “Errata” on page 158  
6. Added Lock bits re-programming errata, see Section 22. “Errata” on page 158  
23.5 Rev. 8127B – 08/09  
1. Updated document template  
2. Expanded document to also cover devices ATtiny4, ATtiny5 and ATtiny9  
3. Added section:  
“Comparison of ATtiny4, ATtiny5, ATtiny9 and ATtiny10” on page 4  
4. Updated sections:  
“ADC Clock – clkADC” on page 18  
“Starting from Idle / ADC Noise Reduction / Standby Mode” on page 20  
“ADC Noise Reduction Mode” on page 24  
“Analog to Digital Converter” on page 25  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
162  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
“SMCR – Sleep Mode Control Register” on page 25  
“PRR – Power Reduction Register” on page 26  
“Alternate Functions of Port B” on page 48  
“Overview” on page 82  
“Physical Layer of Tiny Programming Interface” on page 95  
“Overview” on page 106  
“ADC Characteristics (ATtiny5/10, only)” on page 119  
“Supply Current of I/O Modules” on page 121  
“Register Summary” on page 148  
“Ordering Information” on page 152  
5. Added figure:  
“Using an External Programmer for In-System Programming via TPI” on page 96  
6. Updated figure:  
“Data Memory Map (Byte Addressing)” on page 15  
7. Added table:  
“Number of Words and Pages in the Flash (ATtiny4/5)” on page 108  
8. Updated tables:  
“Active Clock Domains and Wake-up Sources in Different Sleep Modes” on page 23  
“Reset and Interrupt Vectors” on page 35  
“Number of Words and Pages in the Flash (ATtiny9/10)” on page 107  
“Signature codes” on page 109  
23.6 Rev. 8127A – 04/09  
1. Initial revision  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
163  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
164  
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Table of Contents  
Features .....................................................................................................1  
Pin Configurations ...................................................................................2  
1
2
3
1.1  
Pin Description ..................................................................................................2  
Overview ...................................................................................................3  
2.1  
Comparison of ATtiny4, ATtiny5, ATtiny9 and ATtiny10 ....................................4  
General Information .................................................................................5  
3.1  
3.2  
3.3  
3.4  
Resources .........................................................................................................5  
Code Examples .................................................................................................5  
Capacitive Touch Sensing .................................................................................5  
Data Retention ...................................................................................................5  
4
CPU Core ...................................................................................................6  
4.1  
4.2  
4.3  
4.4  
4.5  
4.6  
4.7  
4.8  
Architectural Overview .......................................................................................6  
ALU – Arithmetic Logic Unit ...............................................................................7  
Status Register ..................................................................................................7  
General Purpose Register File ..........................................................................7  
Stack Pointer .....................................................................................................9  
Instruction Execution Timing .............................................................................9  
Reset and Interrupt Handling ...........................................................................10  
Register Description ........................................................................................11  
5
6
Memories .................................................................................................14  
5.1  
5.2  
5.3  
In-System Re-programmable Flash Program Memory ....................................14  
Data Memory ...................................................................................................14  
I/O Memory ......................................................................................................16  
Clock System ..........................................................................................17  
6.1  
6.2  
6.3  
6.4  
6.5  
Clock Subsystems ...........................................................................................17  
Clock Sources .................................................................................................18  
System Clock Prescaler ..................................................................................19  
Starting ............................................................................................................20  
Register Description ........................................................................................21  
7
Power Management and Sleep Modes .................................................23  
7.1  
7.2  
7.3  
Sleep Modes ....................................................................................................23  
Power Reduction Register ...............................................................................24  
Minimizing Power Consumption ......................................................................24  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
1
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
7.4  
Register Description ........................................................................................25  
8
9
System Control and Reset .....................................................................27  
8.1  
8.2  
8.3  
8.4  
Resetting the AVR ...........................................................................................27  
Reset Sources .................................................................................................27  
Watchdog Timer ..............................................................................................30  
Register Description ........................................................................................32  
Interrupts .................................................................................................35  
9.1  
9.2  
9.3  
Interrupt Vectors ..............................................................................................35  
External Interrupts ...........................................................................................36  
Register Description ........................................................................................37  
10 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................40  
10.1  
10.2  
10.3  
10.4  
Overview ..........................................................................................................40  
Ports as General Digital I/O .............................................................................41  
Alternate Port Functions ..................................................................................45  
Register Description ........................................................................................50  
11 16-bit Timer/Counter0 ............................................................................52  
11.1  
11.2  
11.3  
11.4  
11.5  
11.6  
11.7  
11.8  
11.9  
Features ..........................................................................................................52  
Overview ..........................................................................................................52  
Clock Sources .................................................................................................54  
Counter Unit ....................................................................................................55  
Input Capture Unit ...........................................................................................56  
Output Compare Units .....................................................................................58  
Compare Match Output Unit ............................................................................60  
Modes of Operation .........................................................................................61  
Timer/Counter Timing Diagrams ......................................................................69  
11.10 Accessing 16-bit Registers ..............................................................................70  
11.11 Register Description ........................................................................................72  
12 Analog Comparator ................................................................................80  
12.1  
Register Description ........................................................................................80  
13 Analog to Digital Converter ...................................................................82  
13.1  
13.2  
13.3  
13.4  
13.5  
Features ..........................................................................................................82  
Overview ..........................................................................................................82  
Operation .........................................................................................................82  
Starting a Conversion ......................................................................................83  
Prescaling and Conversion Timing ..................................................................84  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
2
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
13.6  
13.7  
13.8  
13.9  
Changing Channel ...........................................................................................87  
ADC Noise Canceler .......................................................................................87  
Analog Input Circuitry ......................................................................................88  
Noise Canceling Techniques ...........................................................................88  
13.10 ADC Accuracy Definitions ...............................................................................89  
13.11 ADC Conversion Result ...................................................................................91  
13.12 Register Description ........................................................................................92  
14 Programming interface ..........................................................................95  
14.1  
14.2  
14.3  
14.4  
14.5  
14.6  
14.7  
Features ..........................................................................................................95  
Overview ..........................................................................................................95  
Physical Layer of Tiny Programming Interface ................................................95  
Access Layer of Tiny Programming Interface ..................................................99  
Instruction Set ................................................................................................100  
Accessing the Non-Volatile Memory Controller .............................................103  
Control and Status Space Register Descriptions ...........................................103  
15 Memory Programming .........................................................................106  
15.1  
15.2  
15.3  
15.4  
15.5  
15.6  
15.7  
Features ........................................................................................................106  
Overview ........................................................................................................106  
Non-Volatile Memories ..................................................................................106  
Accessing the NVM .......................................................................................109  
Self programming ..........................................................................................112  
External Programming ...................................................................................112  
Register Description ......................................................................................114  
16 Electrical Characteristics ....................................................................115  
16.1  
16.2  
16.3  
16.4  
16.5  
16.6  
16.7  
16.8  
Absolute Maximum Ratings* .........................................................................115  
DC Characteristics .........................................................................................115  
Speed ............................................................................................................116  
Clock Characteristics .....................................................................................117  
System and Reset Characteristics ................................................................118  
Analog Comparator Characteristics ...............................................................119  
ADC Characteristics (ATtiny5/10, only) .........................................................119  
Serial Programming Characteristics ..............................................................120  
17 Typical Characteristics ........................................................................121  
17.1  
17.2  
Supply Current of I/O Modules ......................................................................121  
Active Supply Current ....................................................................................122  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
3
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
17.3  
17.4  
17.5  
17.6  
17.7  
17.8  
17.9  
Idle Supply Current ........................................................................................125  
Power-down Supply Current ..........................................................................127  
Pin Pull-up .....................................................................................................128  
Pin Driver Strength ........................................................................................131  
Pin Threshold and Hysteresis ........................................................................135  
Analog Comparator Offset .............................................................................139  
Internal Oscillator Speed ...............................................................................140  
17.10 VLM Thresholds ............................................................................................142  
17.11 Current Consumption of Peripheral Units ......................................................144  
17.12 Current Consumption in Reset and Reset Pulsewidth ...................................147  
18 Register Summary ................................................................................148  
19 Instruction Set Summary .....................................................................150  
20 Ordering Information ...........................................................................152  
20.1  
20.2  
20.3  
20.4  
ATtiny4 ..........................................................................................................152  
ATtiny5 ..........................................................................................................153  
ATtiny9 ..........................................................................................................154  
ATtiny10 ........................................................................................................155  
21 Packaging Information .........................................................................156  
21.1  
21.2  
6ST1 ..............................................................................................................156  
8MA4 .............................................................................................................157  
22 Errata .....................................................................................................158  
22.1  
22.2  
22.3  
22.4  
ATtiny4 ..........................................................................................................158  
ATtiny5 ..........................................................................................................159  
ATtiny9 ..........................................................................................................160  
ATtiny10 ........................................................................................................161  
23 Datasheet Revision History .................................................................162  
23.1  
23.2  
23.3  
23.4  
23.5  
23.6  
Rev. 8127F – 02/13 .......................................................................................162  
Rev. 8127E – 11/11 .......................................................................................162  
Rev. 8127D – 02/10 .......................................................................................162  
Rev. 8127C – 10/09 .......................................................................................162  
Rev. 8127B – 08/09 .......................................................................................162  
Rev. 8127A – 04/09 .......................................................................................163  
Table of Contents......................................................................................1  
Features1 1  
Table of Contents1 4  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
4
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
ATtiny4/5/9/10 [DATASHEET]  
5
8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Atmel Corporation  
Atmel Asia Limited  
Atmel Munich GmbH  
Atmel Japan G.K.  
1600 Technology Drive  
Unit 01-5 & 16, 19F  
Business Campus  
16F Shin-Osaki Kangyo Bldg  
San Jose, CA 95110  
USA  
BEA Tower, Millennium City 5  
418 Kwun Tong Roa  
Kwun Tong, Kowloon  
HONG KONG  
Parkring 4  
1-6-4 Osaki, Shinagawa-ku  
Tokyo 141-0032  
D-85748 Garching b. Munich  
GERMANY  
Tel: (+1) (408) 441-0311  
Fax: (+1) (408) 487-2600  
www.atmel.com  
JAPAN  
Tel: (+49) 89-31970-0  
Fax: (+49) 89-3194621  
Tel: (+81) (3) 6417-0300  
Fax: (+81) (3) 6417-0370  
Tel: (+852) 2245-6100  
Fax: (+852) 2722-1369  
© 2013 Atmel Corporation. All rights reserved. / Rev.: 8127F–AVR–02/2013  
Atmel®, Atmel logo and combinations thereof, Enabling Unlimited Possibilities®, AVR®, tinyAVR® and others are registered trademarks or trademarks of Atmel  
Corporation or its subsidiaries. Other terms and product names may be trademarks of others.  
Disclaimer: The information in this document is provided in connection with Atmel products. No license, express or implied, by estoppel or otherwise, to any intellectual property right is granted by this  
document or in connection with the sale of Atmel products. EXCEPT AS SET FORTH IN THE ATMEL TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF SALES LOCATED ON THE ATMEL WEBSITE, ATMEL ASSUMES  
NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER AND DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY WARRANTY RELATING TO ITS PRODUCTS INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OR NON-INFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL ATMEL BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE, SPECIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS AND PROFITS, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, OR LOSS OF  
INFORMATION) ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THIS DOCUMENT, EVEN IF ATMEL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. Atmel makes no  
representations or warranties with respect to the accuracy or completeness of the contents of this document and reserves the right to make changes to specifications and products descriptions at any time  
without notice. Atmel does not make any commitment to update the information contained herein. Unless specifically provided otherwise, Atmel products are not suitable for, and shall not be used in,  
automotive applications. Atmel products are not intended, authorized, or warranted for use as components in applications intended to support or sustain life.  

相关型号:

ATTINY11

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6PC

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6PI

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6PJ

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 6MHz, CMOS, PDIP8, 0.300 INCH, PLASTIC, MS-001BA, DIP-8
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6PL

暂无描述
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6PU

8-bit Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6SC

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6SI

8-bit AVR Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6SJ

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 6MHz, CMOS, PDSO8, 0.209 INCH, EIAJ, PLASTIC, SOP-8
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6SL

RISC Microcontroller, 8-Bit, FLASH, 6MHz, CMOS, PDSO8, 0.209 INCH, EIAJ, PLASTIC, SOP-8
ATMEL

ATTINY11-6SU

8-bit Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL

ATTINY11L

8-bit Microcontroller with 1K Byte Flash
ATMEL